OWNER'S MANUAL MINI MINI CONVERTIBLE
Cooper Congratulations on your new MINI Cooper S This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of this vehicle. It should stay with the vehicle when sold to provide John Cooper the next owner with important operating, safety and mainte- Works nance information. We wish you an enjoyable driving experience. © 2010 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English VII/10, 09 10 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. 141 139 132 130 ENTERTAINMENT 126 119 111 110 NAVIGATION 100 TIPS DRIVING 92 87 83 71 59 50 47 41 26 CONTROLS 21 20 16 10 AGLANCE AT 6 4 Using this Owner's Manual page to refer index, the by using is item or topic lar on aparticu- information find to way fastest The CONTENTS 226 External devices CD player Radio On/off and tone What to do if… guidance Destination Destination entry system Navigation driving when remember to Things Practical interior accessories Climate Lamps Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls overview Driving safely children Transporting Adjustments closing and Opening system activation Voice Letters and numbers On-board computer Cockpit Reporting safetydefects Notes . 226 219 214 REFERENCE 208 197 193 191 187 178 176 MOBILITY 171 164 152 Communication Everything from Ato Z system activation voice the for commands Short data Technical receiving assistance and Giving Replacing components Care Maintenance thehood Under Wheels tires and Refueling Connected MINI Office Telephone 3
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Notes the vehicle. the to serious damage and injury sibility ofpersonal tion. < for yourvehicle. tocare effectively more enable you and vehicle select individual functions. to used texts Display Control Identifies "..." ofprinting. time the at available notyet functions and equipment as aswell accessories, optional and equipment of thevehicle. of owner;it part is animportant to new the Manual thisOwner's over tohand remember future, the in time some at MINI sellwish to your you Should inthefirstchapter. this find vehicle, an gain ofyour will initial you overview to you wish If ofthemanual. theback at index istoreferthedetailed topics specific find to way fastest The tofind. easy Manual Owner's inthis information all the make to tried have We Manual Using this Owner's Notes 4 * Symbols used www.MINI.com. at Internet on the technology, its on example for the MINI, about can more information find You time. atany you advise to glad be will dealer MINI your questions, other any have you Should ofinformation sources Additional Indicates special equipment, country-specific country-specific equipment, special Indicates Marks the end specific end itemof a Marks the of informa- help protect theenvironment. protect help to taken be that can measures to Refers lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos- the toavoid order in precisely lowed fol- be that must precautions Indicates gaining the optimum benefit from your from benefit theoptimum gaining inwill you that assist information Indicates < < < plementary Owner's Manuals. Owner's plementary Sup- theenclosed Manual, Owner's observe this in described not equipment features MINI your If ownvehicle's your equipment. and manual this possible differencesbetween the descriptions in information on a particular part or assembly. or part particular a on information marked by asterisks by marked are equipment special and options describing notspecified foryour vehicle. have own Sections you that equipment and accessories on mation infor- contain may in that manual the mind Bear range. model specific a with available makes MINI your of manufacturer the that ment equip- and ofoptions array the entire describes This Owner's Manual ofequipment. items Whenordered you your MINI,you chose various AG. Aktiengesellschaft,Werke BMW Motoren Bayerische is the MINI your of manufacturer The The individual vehicle components onvehicle Symbols Manual could differ from those on your onyour vehicle. those from differ could Manual in this Owner's described that cases features ogy. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional technol- state-of-the-art with advanced, bined com- safety standards and highest quality the to embody continue vehicles thatMINI ensure ous, ongoing development that is conceived to pursues a ofcontinu- policy manufacturer The notice Editorial voice activation system. activation voice {{ system. activation { ...... } }} Verbal instructions to use with the voice voice tousewith the Verbal instructions Identifies the answers generated by by the generated the answers Identifies vant section of this Owner's Manual for Manual Owner's section of this vant rele- should thatyou consult the Indicates * to assist you in identifying identifying youin toassist these items, are available from all dealers. MINI items,from areavailable these using on advice professional with together MINI, ofthe manufacturer the by approved products other and Accessories MINI Parts, MINI Original pants. risk without and safely its orits operation, occu- thevehicle, to either MINI a on used be can it if verify to manufacturers other by made product every test cannot MINI the of manufacturer The MINI. the of ufacturer man- the by approved not accessories and parts of installation from resulting damage for liability any notaccept will MINI ofthe manufacturer The workmanship. parts to be free from defects in material and these warrants oftheMINI manufacturer The vehicle. your on installed optimum performance when to ensure of MINI the themanufacturer by tested oughly thor- been have they that assurance the acquire and Original MINI Parts, you simultaneously oftheMINI themanufacturer by approved and tested accessories purchase you When theMINI. of facturer hazards. ger of subsequent damage and related safety is outproperly, work not there is carried a dan- thisIf manufacturer. theMINI of specifications the with accordance working in personnel trained has specially that oraworkshop dealer onyourMINIwork only out carried by a MINI thenecessary have Therefore, methods. repair ics, requires specially adapted maintenance and Parts and accessories repair and Maintenance For your safety and accessories approved by the manu- the by approved accessories and parts usegenuine safety, your For own electron- powerful and materials modern e.g.theuseof technology, Advanced < California Proposition 65 warning soap and water. and soap with your thoroughly washing skin by protect cancer incaused laboratory animals. Always have oil engine contains chemicals that Used handling. after hands your leadWash lead contain and compounds. related accessories and posts, terminals Battery ductive harm. other or repro- defects birth and cancer to cause California of State the to known chemicals emit or contain wear component of products certain and vehicles in contained fluids certain addition, In harm. reproductive and defects birth and to theStateofCalifornia to cause cancer known chemicals emit or contain vehicle, a in nishings fur- interior the in found components including warning: ustoissue lawrequires California thefollowing automotive part. certified any using individual or establishment performedmaybe byany automotive repair for additional information. additional for dealer MINI your See Warranty. Limited MINI the of thevalidity oraffect system electrical vehicle's with the its interfere safety, compromise cle, thevehi- to damage extensive cause sories, may CBs, radioswalkie-talkies, or ham acces- similar forinstance, equipment, ortransceiver antenna, anexternally mounted using without vehicle the fromwithin phone mobile ofany operation including dust telephones, shields, brake nents, compo- radar detectors, suspension wheels, amplifiers, radios, asalarms, MINI, such your of themanufacturer by approved notbeen have Installation and operation of accessories that automobile components and parts, parts, and components automobile of variety awide and exhaust Engine the emission control devices and systems and devices control emission the of orrepair replacement, Maintenance, < < < 5
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Notes for further information. further for Relations Customer contact acase, please such or forsuchtions or region. country exclusions In also be aware of any applicable warranty limita- Youshould requirements. and registration tions condi- operating prevailing different tomeet cle region,may you be required to adapt your vehi- or country another in vehicle your operate to wish you If conditions. those under operated is deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle to in order region continental and country your in requirements homologation and ditions con- operating particular the meet to designed and adapted specifically been has vehicle Your models. Canadian for Booklet Guide Service or and for models US theWarranty Booklet in Information in Warranty listed theService and is warranties these about information Detailed > > > > > ties: warran- the following by is Your MINI covered thoroughly. We recommend that you read this publication Service andwarranty 6 1117. 1-800-831- Telephone 07675-1227, Jersey New P.O. LLC, America, Box1227,Westwood, in NHTSA, addition notifying MINI ofto North Administration, Safety Traffic Highway National inform the should immediately you death, acrash injury cause could cause or could or that defect a has vehicle your that believe you If inUS. the operated and The following applies only to vehicles owned For US customers safetyReporting defects Warranty California SystemLimited Emission Control Warranty Performance Emissions Federal Warranty Defect System Emissions Federal Warranty Limited Perforation Rust New Vehicle Limited Warranty roadsafety safety vehicle from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ motor about otherinformation can obtain also You 1-800-333-0510. hotline toll-free the phone tele- may and Recalls, Investigations Defect Canada, toTransport defect safety-related toreport who wish a customers Canadian For Canadian customers vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov from safety vehicle motor about information other alsoobtain can You Street, SW., DC 20590. Washington, Seventh NHTSA, or 400 to:administrator, gov; write gotohttp://www.safercar. 1-800-424-9153); (TTY: 1-888-327-4236 toll-free at Hotline Safety call may you contact NHTSA, To the Vehicle America, LLC. you, ofNorth dealer, orMINI your between problems individual in involved become cannot NHTSA However, campaign. remedy and recall a exists in a it of vehicles, order defect may group safety a that finds it if and investigation, an open If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may 7
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
AT A GLANCE
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communication
MOBILITY
REFERENCE Cockpit Around the steering wheel: Controls displays the and Controls steering wheel: Around Cockpit 10 2 1 in and out and in mirrors, theexterior Adjusting folding them Adaptive Light Control Light Adaptive Turn signals Turn Automatic headlamp control headlamp Automatic beams Low Parking lamps * 45 83 54 83 * 84 * 83 Computer Roadside parking lamps flasher Headlamp beams High * 60 85 54 * 85 6 5 4 11 10 9 8 7 3 Tachometer Releasing the hood the Releasing Adjusting the steering wheel thesteering Adjusting surface theentire Horn: Buttons Ignition lock Always Open Timer Always Open * control cruise Activating/deactivating volume reduce or Increase Left: decelerating or accelerating and speed Storing Right: Scrolling through the redial list theredial Scrolling through track amusic Selecting Changing the radio station vation system vation acti- voice Activating/deactivating is selectednumber number and redialing if no phone starting dialing starting Press: accepting and ending a call, Telephone Instrument lightingInstrument Continuing cruise control cruise Continuing starting/stopping theengine and on/off ignition the Switching Wiper system thetrip odometer Resetting on steering wheel steering on 12 50 * 57 * : 187 61 * * 55 of selected phone phone of selected 21 86 46 * 57 59 50 11
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Cockpit 3 Displays 12 1 2 Resetting the trip odometer thetrip Resetting > with indicator and warning lamps warning and indicator with Tachometer > Display for Indicator and warning lamps warning and Indicator Current vehicle vehicle speed Current 59 59 59 13 13 8 7 6 5 4 Fuel gauge Control Display lamps warning and indicator with Speedometer lighting Instrument > > > > > > > > Display for > Personal Profilesettings Settings and information and Settings Computer Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor Pressure Tire the Resetting Initializing theFlat Monitor Tire Odometer and trip odometer trip and Odometer remaining distance to be driven Date of next scheduled service, and Outside temperature Outside Position of automatic transmission automatic of Position 59 * 60 17 86 59 26 63 59 * 13 64 75 * * 52 77 started or the ignition is switched on. isswitched ignition or the started is theengine onbriefly when come thus and functioning proper for checked are lamps Some via Check Control, page onhowto respond, and ofa malfunction cause call You can up e.g.onthe more information, lamps. warning and indicator ofthedisplayed meaning the explain Display theControl of edge theupper at messages Text Explanatory text messages or ious combinations andcolors in indicator area lamps light up warning can inIndicator and var- The concept lamps warning and Indicator 2 . 67 . 1
indicate certain functions: certain indicate area display in lamps indicator following The Indicator lamps without text messages as soon as the corresponding lamp comes comes on. lamp asthecorresponding as soon will urgentcases, information In be this shown Turn signals Turn control Cruise emissions on exhaust effect adverse with malfunction Engine applied brake Parking stability driving maintain to order in forces DSC or DTC is regulating the drive flashes: Lamp Rear fog lamp Fog lamps flasher beams/headlamp High 72 * 85 54 * 57 85 192 51 85 13 1
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Cockpit Around the center console the center Around 14 3 7 6 5 4 2 1 control climate Airor automatic conditioner Radio/CD Speedometer flashers warning Hazard ger airbags Indicator/warning lamp Indicator/warning column ing in thesteer- microphone Convertible: MINI tem for sys- microphone processing MINI: voice * and for hands-free telephone forhands-free and * Reading lamps Glass sunroof, Glass sunroof, electric Air distribution to the windshield the to distribution Air conditioner air for distribution Air Recirculated-air mode Temperature waveband Selecting source theaudio Changing Changing the radio station or track lamps Interior roof sliding/tilting the ing clos- and opening Convertible: MINI Color of ambient lighting ambient of Color rate flow and airdistribution Automatic footwell the to distribution Air area body upper the to distribution Air 87 * * 81 12 * * 86 for front passen- front for 86 * 35 * 37 * 86 * * 14 13 12 11 10 8 9 Sport button Sport Display ontheControl main Accessing menu the press or turn directions, four in Move joystick MINI Display Control onthe menu different to a Changing > > systems control stability Driving Switches in the center console center the in Switches interface audio port, USB AUX-IN Dynamic Traction Control Dynamic Traction Dynamic Stability DSC Control Fog lamps Fog Rear fog lamp window unit window power central Convertible: MINI windows Power Central lockingCentral system,inside Seat heating Seat Air flowrate Windshield heating defroster window Rear windows Defrosting function Cooling cooling Maximum * 17 141 * 16 74 ,
142 * * 85 * 36 44 85 35 * * *
DTC * 72
73 30 15
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE On-board computer Controls Thefollowing position. provides section an asingle central from tobe operated functions This these allows ofswitches. number alarge of functions the integrates computer on-board The On-board computer 16 2 1 > > > settings: adjust and to items menu used to select be joystick can MINI The MINI joystick Control Display Push, arrow Push, arrow Turn, arrow Move in arrows fourdirections, Move 6 7 5 4 3 users by being distracted. and other road car'soccupants the endangering connection with the relevant equipment. therelevant with connection trol of the individual functions is described in con- to menunavigation. The basic introduction fic and road conditions allow this, to avoid to avoid this, allow conditions and road fic whentraf- joystick only theMINI Operate Changing to another menu another to Changing themain Accessing menu < 17 selection for areavailable in white items displayed Menu item a menu Selecting viaaccessed the main menu. be can computer oftheon-board All functions button. Press the the Open main menu seconds. 10 approx. after hidden automatically is message The main The is displayed.menu joystick. MINI the Press message: the hide To Display: ontheControl appears message the following readiness, As ofradio principle Operating marks, e.g. marks, "Settings". quotation in depicted are selected be should that themenuitems Manual, theOwner's In items Owner's Manual in the Menu tional panels can be accessed. be can panels tional Arrows pointing left or right indicate that addi- panels. the between switch orright to the left toward joystick MINI the Move overlap. is displayed menu ona panel. panels The can anew "Radio", e.g. item, amenu selecting After Changing between panels 1. cuted. is is orthefunction A newmenu exe- displayed 2. menu menu item is highlighted. joystick until the desiredTurn the MINI rs h IIjoystick. MINI the Press 17
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE On-board computer > > menu: "Options" the in displayed is following The "Options"until menuisthe displayed. repeatedly totheright joystick MINI the Move the Open menuOptions 18 2. 1. Adjusting settings 3. Control options for the selected menu. the for selected options Control settings. Screen ting isdisplayed. ting Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set- field. a Select ting. set- the toconfirm joystick MINI the Press 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Example: setting theclock rs h IIjoystick. MINI the press and set theminutes to joystick theMINI Turn joystick. MINI the press and hours tosetthe joystick MINI the Turn joystick. press theMINI selected, and joystick until "Time:"Turn is the MINI joystick. press theMINI selected, and joystick until "Time/Date"Turn the is MINI joystick. press theMINI selected, and is until"Settings" joystick MINI the Turn button. main The is displayed.menu the Press the voice activation system activation voice the displays message Control via orCheck entries during hidden temporarily is information Status Other displays: 4 3 5 2 1 Status information > > > > Display for: work, depends on the mobile phone > display for traffic bulletins traffic for display > > status Telephone Time Traffic bulletins are switched off. areswitched bulletins Traffic display: No on. areswitched bulletins Traffic "TI": Telephone devices external CD, Radio, Entertainment: the vehicle with paired phone mobile ofthe Name Incoming, outgoing or missed ormissed Incoming, call outgoing Sound output is switched offor is switched output Sound Reception strength thewireless net- of strength Reception Text message Roaming * : * active * received * . * : 2. 1. off/on Display Switching Control To switch on, press the MINI joystick. MINI the press on, switch To "Switch off control display" control off "Switch is menu displayed. until the"Options" edly totheright repeat- joystick theMINI Move 19
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Letters and numbers 3. 2. 1. numbers lettersEntering and and Letters numbers 20 letters and entering numbers: between switch can you menu, the on Depending between lettersSwitching and numbers Symbol Symbol "OK": confirm entry. needed. letters or Select if additional numbers numbers. or theletters select joystick: MINI Turn the Entering numbers Entering letters Entering Function Entera blank space numbers letters or joystick: delete all MINI holdPress the and number or letter one delete joystick: Press theMINI Function case letters: case letters and lower- uppercase entering between switch can you menu, the on Depending lowercase letters between uppercase Switching and > > in the vehicle. stored tothedata compared continuously are theentries search: Destination automatically. be added may letters and time aletteris every entered down narrowed the selection addresses: names Entry and isof navigation during concept Wordmatch Symbol able on the Control Display. avail- spelling in of any used the languages the with entered be can names Town/city able. addresses are those for whichdata are avail- forentering offered only letters The letters touppercase letters ercase low- from toswitch forward: joystick Move the MINI letters case uppercase letters to lower- from toswitch forward: joystick Move the MINI Function 1. system activation voice Activating commands Saying intheManual Owner's Symbols page language, computer the on-board Setting tified. be iden- can commands thespoken ing, so that is operat- system activation voice the in which language the select computer, on-board the Via Prerequisite instructions or questions. in support the form provides of systems and control into signals selected for commands the oral transforms system activation voice The joystick. MINI the Itvoiced as commands. is not to necessary use ontheControl menuitems be Display can Most steering wheel. the your from hands removing without systems vehicle of various operation trol tocon- allowsyou system activation voice The The concept Voice activationsystem Press the button on the steering wheel. onthesteering button Press the vation system. vation {{ word. { ... 70 ... } }} Saythespecified for word commands . Indicates responses of the of the voice acti- responses Indicates operating the CD player. CD the operating tem will aloud read the possible commands for "CD" selected you example thesys- if For have read aloud: commands thepossible Having Display. Control the on relatedcommands to the selected menu item possible the aloud read system the have can You aloud Having the possible commands read Commands wheel steering the on button or the Press activation system voice orTerminating canceling 2. board computer. theon- via ofequipment item the operating by arepossible, continue nofurtherIf commands play when you can enter additional commands. This symbol is ontheControl displayed Dis- commands. toreceive spoken is system ready activation voice thatthe indicate signal acoustic an play. Dis- Control the on appears command The Say the command. { { Cancel Voice commands This symbol onthe ControlDisplay and } * } or { Help } 21
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Voice activation system menu item is selected, page selected, is item menu ofwhich immediately, irrespective functions certain toperform you enable commands Short short commands via immediately functions up Calling e.g.:function, torun areoftenanumber of commands There a Using alternative commands 22 3. 2. 1. system are shortened. activation ofthevoice responses and requests the dialog, ofthespoken version short the With version. short the or dialog standard the uses system activation voice the setwhether can You thevoicedialog Setting 2. 1. Example: selectingthe track ofaCD the menuOpen main 4. "Speech mode:" "Speech "Language/Units" "Settings" wheel. on thesteering button Press the necessary. if output sound Entertainment on Switch > > setting: a Select 3. { { Main menu Main Radio "Short" "Default" {{ System says: { e.g.: track, music the Select rc 4 C D track Track 4 Track } or { Radio on Radio } }} } }
219 . > > > > > > ing: For voice commands, bear in mind the follow- Notes speaking. while thevehicle noise in ambient Avoid noise. outside from interference prevent to closed Keep the doors, windows and glassroof and windows the doors, Keep name. station of the pronunciation dard stan- use the station, radio a selecting When system. activation voice of the guage lan- the in commands the speak Always fornavigation. tion destina- a entering when spelling to applies same The pauses. and emphases excessive avoiding volume, atnormal and smoothly digits and thecommands Pronounce connection. ofatelephone ment establish- the delay unnecessarily can This change. can pitch vocal and thevoice tions, call. In stressful situa- emergency an tiate toini- system activation notusethevoice Do *
23
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communication
MOBILITY
REFERENCE Opening and closing Service data in the remote control, page control, remote the in data Service is stored remotecontrol, in refer the ments to require- service about information addition, In page iscar unlocked, refer Profile, to Personal the when recognized iscontrol remote which settings called up and implemented depend on the is used, unit control one remote than more If page battery, areplaceable control contains remote Keys/remote controls Keys/remote Opening andclosing 26 of loss. event the in replacements as or units asadditional trols con- supply newremote can dealer Your MINI New remote controls Access Comfort with vehicles In equipped status. charge the tomaintain ayear twice least control at useeach remote therefore should You driven. being is car the while lock tion igni- the in itis when recharged is that battery Each remote control contains a rechargeable control Remote 26 34 . . 191 * , the , the . > > > locks: following fits key the integrated The button Press Integrated key each person uses a separate remote control. remote usesaseparate person each is that Aprerequisite different people. three can setfor remote controls be At most three settings. thecorresponding and trol con- remote another elsewith someone by used was car your infor even if themeantime you, activated be will settings your that means This for it stored are up implemented. called and the settings control and is recognized remote thecar, the unlock in you use.When rently control cur- for the remote are stored settings ofthese Profiles, of most Personal ally. By means be setindividu- can MINI of functions your The The concept Personal Profile rest, page rearseatback- the locking Convertible: MINI page glovecompartment, Convertible: MINI Driver's door, page 94 1 103 to release the key. the torelease 29 . > > > > > > > > following:the lockson the releases and engages system simultaneously The is closed. door driver's the whenever foroperation is ready system central locking The The concept system locking Central > > > pages. specified the to onspecific settings, moreinformation refer For Personal Profile settings > > Entertainment: distribution air and volume air perature, tem- the setting program, AUTO the tivating activating/deac- control: climate Automatic > settings: Light > trol PDC trol forPark Con- Distance warning visual Show > > > > tachometer: the in and speedometer the in computer, on-board onthe displays forthe Settings Fuel filler flap filler Fuel Liftgate Doors > activation turnsignal Triple vehicle of the locking Automatic unlocked being is car the when of thecentral system locking Response Adjusting volume levels volume Adjusting control Tone Pathway lighting Pathway Daytime running lights running Daytime and temperature and distance covered/remainingdistances consumption, forfuel Units of measure Brightness Brightness theControl of Display format Date clock the of mode 12h/24h Language on the Control ontheControl Display Language * 71 67 131 83 64 84 130 54 67 27 30 70 70 89 lamps. alarmsystem lamps. The interior and lamps welcome the on/off switch dles. The remote control can also be used to han- thelock or door using buttons unlocked being from time. Itdoors the same prevents the is alsooperated system at anti-theft The deactivated, page side. theout- from opened can be thevehicle that so thevehicle leave you when with you key the rior lampscome on. inte- flashersand warning hazard the addition, In unlocks locking automatically. system central the accident, severe sufficiently ofa theevent In forcentral system, Button locking page Operating from inside > > > from outside Operating control incontrol use. fortheremote is stored Thesetting unlocked. ofthecar parts setwhich are also You can mode Unlocking button. lamps welcome andThe interior lamps on. come the Press Unlocking control remote the Using outside from and closing: Opening sides. handles on the driver's and passenger's In cars with Comfort Access Comfort with cars In lock door the Via control remote the Via < could lock the doors from the inside. Take Take inside. the from doors the lock could vehicle parked in a oranimals Persons 31 * . * is also activated or * , via the door door the , via 30 . 27
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Opening and closing the button. the pressing continue opens you if top convertible the vehicle, the windows are raised after the With Convenient Access Convenient With open. remains window side The open. is completely top convertible the Convertible:release button and push again until ofyour MINI top convertible the open to order In sunroof thesliding are opened. and windows 1. 28 down. button sunroof theglass and areopened windows power The the Hold opening Convenient 3. 2. 4. "Settings" "Unlock button" "Unlock "Door locks" > > item: menu a Select entire vehicle. entire the unlock to twice button the Press Press the button once unlock once button to flap fuel only and the the door driver's filler Press the unlock once button to only door Driver's vehicle. the entire Press the All doors * is tilted. the InConvertible, MINI the * . * : when : areclose you when to is switchedon. button interrupts the closing process. theclosing interrupts button button. closed. are windows the top and convertible The Press and hold the thewindows. and top convertible the close can used Access forComfort to be control remote closetothevehicle, you the are When MINI Convertible: closing* convenient knowledge. special inside be unlocked cannot from vehicle without button. the Press Locking Press the button. button. vehiclein parking garages, etc. your tolocate can usethis also function You the Press locked: is car the While lamps oninterior Switching 4. 3. 2. 1. orunlocked. locked whenit has vehicle been confirm have the To signals confirmation Setting Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehicle vehicle the locking/unlocking when Flashing rs h IIjoystick. MINI the Press "Flash when lock/unlock" "Door locks" "Settings" sure that no one is injured. Releasing the the Releasing injured. is one no that sure tobe process closing the during Watch the because is inside, any person there if theoutside from thevehicle notlock Do means of the of the means control.remote by possible not is closing Convenient < < < user's authority to operate this this equipment. tooperate authority user's > > conditions: two tothefollowing issubject Operation Rules. This device complies partwith 15of the FCC statement: Compliance LX8CAS LX8766E LX8766S FCC ID: by the following: is governed Operation regulations. Commission 15ofCommunications theFCC/Federal part with unitscomply receiver and transmitter The For US owners only page drive; this will extended battery, the recharge an control during Usethis remote charged. is dis- control remote the in battery the control, remote a with locked be longer no can car the If key. integrated withthe lock door atthe car the lock and unlock occurs, this If waves. radio local to due may malfunction control remote The Malfunctions unlocked. inadvertently been not has theliftgate that check trip, each after and Before isclosed. after it again locked liftgate was locked before opening, it will be the If area. cargo the in down key the place not To preventaccidentally lockingyourself out, do opening. before is available clearance adequate button. the Press Unlocking the liftgate cause undesired operation. undesired cause may that interference including received, interference any accept must device this and ence, interfer- harmful mustnot cause this device 26 changes to these devices could void the couldthe void thesedevices to changes or modifications unauthorized Any and up toward the rear. Make sure that therear.Make up and toward out swings theliftgate isopened, it When . < < windows and glass sunroof glass and windows via the door lock. thedoor via Locking the vehicle. the Locking door, page door, or driver the passenger opening and Unlocking locking button, page central presstheinterior closed, thedoors With gate together: lockfillerTo allfuelthe doors, flap, lift- the and lock. door withthe locked page parts setwhich areunlocked,You can of car the lock the Using door Releasing the key stops theoperation. thekey stops Releasing noonegets pinched. process) ing ensure close. windows theside finally and sunroof, folding the by first, closes followed top convertible the Convertible, theMINI In locking. or thekey forunlocking in the position Hold Opening/closing system analarm With operation Convenient > > 27 fort Access fort When is noalarmsystem there When the convertible top also during theopen- during also top convertible the (in of case process roof closing the During the outside. from door the close and door senger's pas- the on button lock safety the press lock, or thedoor via key theintegrated with door driver's the Lock . 30 . * , thedriver's is only door 30 * orComfort Access to lock to the vehicle. < * can be operated operated be can * or Com- or < * , the , the 29
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Opening and closing side. fromtheout- be opened can thevehicle that so you thevehicle keyleave with when you the from inside and closing: Opening positions. theend to lock door inthe key integrated the ing driver's door can be unlocked or locked by turn- the malfunction, ofanelectrical theevent In operation Manual 30 > > Locking > > and opening Unlocking unlocked remains fuel flap filler The isnotactivated. system theft anti- the but closed, are doors the when gate lift- switch locks and The or unlocks the doors the lock button. lock the using locked door be driver's cannot open the out, locked being from you prevent To of lock a button thesafety door. press down switch or Press the it. opens time thesecond door, the unlocks time first the door twice: ofeither handle onthedoor pull or armrest the above handle pull door then the and system locking central the for switch using the together doors the unlock Either < could lock the doors from the inside. Take fromtheinside. lock doors the Take could vehicle aparked in oranimals Persons * . control unless the vehicle is unlocked first. unlocked is vehicle unless the control gate. remote control control currently in remote use. 3. 2. 1. inuse. trol for is theremote con- stored locks. Thesetting in thecar can which setthe situations also You Automatic locking Opening Liftgate The setting is selected and stored stored for and the is selected The setting > > item: menu a Select "Door locks" "Settings" < gate cannot be unlocked using the remote using unlocked the be cannot gate In somemarket-specific versions, the lift- thelift- opening before clearance ficient avoidTo damage, make surethere is suf- vehicle as soon as you begin todrive. begin assoonyou vehicle locking the systemlocks The central drive" to start. after "Lock opened. been has door if ashort time no vehicle after locks the The central locking system automatically opened is door no if Lock < 2. 1. also manually release the liftgate. can you malfunction, electrical an of event the In Convertible MINI the in releasing Manually MINI Convertible can be opened. and unlocked is liftgate The period. extended in button arrow,or thehandle, Press the the together with the belt strap. thebelt with together button Press rest back- open the and key integrated Use the h pntigt s15ls8 kg. lbs/80 175 is tailgate open the load that beplaced may maximum on The button of the remote control, foran oftheremote button 1 lock. 2 and fold down backrest backrest down fold and < the liftgate make it easier to pull it down. it pull to easier it make liftgate the of trim panel interior recessesthe on handle The occur. Closing > > of: means by ortampering entry briefly unauthorized system indicates alarm The > > > > if: reacts activated, when system, alarm The The concept system* Alarm 3. Switching on the hazard warning flashers warning on thehazard Switching alarm acoustic An battery the from supply the power in interruption an is There away towing to prior ortoraise it wheels the steal and it up jack to made is attempt an if instance for changes, inclination car's The thecar inside is There movement isliftgate opened or the lid compartment engine the door, A released. is liftgate thehandle, seearrow. Pull The gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may may injuries otherwise, clear; is gate lift- of the path closing the that sure Make < 31
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Opening and closing alarm. monitored. and locked again button it liftgate is you close the subsequently When remotecontrol. on the the of means by liftgate the open is thealarmsystem armed, can you when Even alarmsystem is armed ordisarmed. the or unlocked, is locked the car Whenever Arming and disarming 32 > > flashes. LED one minutes 16 approx. is thesystem armed, all pulse.When After LEDs Display on the revolution counter > > > offan alarmSwitching twoseconds. foratleast button anybutton. Press alarm: the off Switching Press the yourself situation. in a dangerous find you if system alarm the activate can You Panic mode* ton on thedoor lock. flashes. Afterwards, minutes. oneLED approx. 16 for seconds 10 approx. after pulse LEDs the and deadlocked are items remaining the fully, closed not are these if Even closed. erly prop- not is liftgate the or hood the door, A intervals: at short flashes LED One armed. is system flashes: or LED pulse LEDs In cars with Comfort Access lock. theignition into fully thekey Insert Unlock the carwith theremote control. unlocking via the door lock triggers the the lock triggers thedoor via unlocking certain market-specific versions, In < * , pressthebut- , must beclosed. glassroof and thewindows correctly, operate can detector theinterior movement Before detector movement Interior car'swheelsor itto steal away. the tow ismade ifanattempt instance, for is triggered, alarm The monitored. is inclination vehicle's The Tilt alarm sensor > > interior movement detector offthe Switching tilt alarm sensor and > > > situations: alarms,e.g. false thefollowing prevents This in offtogether. beswitched can detector interior the movement sensor and alarm tilt The Avoiding false alarms alarms. false Avoiding to refer alarm, afalse trigger may e.g.treeleaves, objects, Falling is open. top theconvertible if even arearmed, sensor motion interior the including system alarm anti-theft the way, theseat'ssurface. height This of the to up is monitored compartment passenger The MINI Convertible > > key. con- remote the on button integrated withthe twice thevehicle Lock introl twice succession. the Press car the inside remain to are pets If trains, ortrailersferries oncar-carrying transported When being In duplex garages made to tamper thecar. with tamper to made was an attempt minutes: 5 approx. than nolonger ignition, but in for inserted the until thekey unlocking LEDs flash is after car. No attempt made towas tamper with the is vehicle unlocked: outafter the go LEDs vated. The interior movement detector is not acti- > > > > tions: Access following func- the supports Comfort starting on page on starting found are closing and opening on Instructions Access. Comfort for control remote the on buttons the pressing orby Access Comfort control the above-mentioned functions using you whether difference no makes it Essentially, Comparison to standard remote controls > > > > requirements Functional compartment. passenger in the or vicinity immediate the within control remote the detects automatically vehicle The pocket. close toyour e.g.in control your body, jacket theremote is wear todo All need hand. you your in control theremote tohold having without cle vehi- toenteryour you enables Access Comfort Comfort Access* locked. and unlocked is next offuntil the car areswitched detector sensor theinterior movement The tilt alarm and 2seconds. in shortsuccession LEDs for flash approx. Comfort Access for control theremote with control soft-top and closing convenient Convertible: MINI engine the Starting itself by theliftgate Unlocking Unlocking/locking the vehicle roof able to operate the windows and glass sun- The doors and liftgate must be closed to be vehicle. the inside is control theremote that detects vehicle the when started be only can engine The seconds. 2 approx. after until again unlocked or locked be cannot vehicle The vehicle. the of outside is use in currently control remote the that detects vehicle the when locked be only can theliftgate or vehicle The * . 26 . refer to page to refer remotecontrol, with the opening Convenient is unlocked. vehicle entire mode onpage Unlocking to refer setting, the on Depending button Press To unlock signal anacoustic and flash flashers warning hazard will slightly. theliftgate closed, reopen The is liftgate the after area vehicle's cargo locked liftgate. of ontheoutside the button Press the Unlocking the liftgate separately operational. astheremote is closed as soon and opened top be can convertible and windows vehicle, the isinside control remote a if Convertible: MINI button Press Locking essary. if nec- or the closing procedure, opening Repeat control is inside aremote thevehicle. whether checking is system the top, convertible the Access are described below. theuseof Comfort regarding Special features * again. thevehicle tolock again button Press the has been accidentally left inside the accidentally has been control that a remote detects thevehicle If closing the windows, the glass sunroof or sunroof glass the thewindows, closing or opening while delay brief a notice you If < sounds. < 1 1 28 . . 27 < . , only the orthe , only door driver's the 33
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Opening and closing the ignition lock. ignition the is in positionN,the remote control mustin be lever selector the when off engine the switch To are open. thedoors offand is switched theengine when sunroof orglass windows the ableto operate be to lock ignition the into control remote the Insert again. operated be can sunroof glass the and windows the vehicle, the inside is located control remote the and again closed are liftgate and doors the If opened. notbeen has liftgate the or a door as long so glasssunroof and windows the you still operate can off, is switched theengine If andWindows glass sunroof, electric* 34 waves. radio AccessComfort may tomalfunction due local Malfunction roll. can vehicle The 4. 3. 2. 1. transmission into a car wash with a vehicle automatic driving Before lever isselector in position P, page the off when be switched only can engine The automatic transmission offthe engine with in Switching cars page lock, ignition the into control Itvehicle. toinsert is not a necessary remote onwhenaremote control is inside the switched be or ignition can started the be can engine The engine Starting the page button, Start/Stop briefly by readiness on radio Switch the pressing readiness onradio Switching Switch off theengine. off Switch N. toposition lever selector the Move brake. the Depress lock. into ignition remote control Insert otherwise, the engine will start. will theengine otherwise, Do not depress the brake or the clutch; 50 . 50 51 < . . trol. 10 seconds. approx. within restarted only can be off, theengine is switched engine lock. theignition into control remote another insert it vehicle necessary, If checked. or have the inside you with control theremote Take tioning. is notinsidecontrol oris the vehicle malfunc- Warning lamps Warning 3. 2. 1. time. to time from replaced to be need will that battery a Access contains Comfort control for remote The thebatteryReplacing and start the engine. control ignition into lock theremote the Insert grated key. inte- the orusing control remote onthe buttons the via vehicle the or close open happens, this If Press the cover on to close. to on cover the Press up. ing fac- side the plus with battery thenew Insert Remove the cover. or to or to your MINI dealer. center toarecycling battery old the Take replace the battery in the remote con- remote the in battery the replace ontheControl Display: appears sage a mes- onand comes lamp indicator The inside the thevehicle. After no longer is control remote the running: is engine warningThe lamp onwhen the comes Theremote be started. cannot engine the theengine: start to ismade attempt warningThe lamp onwhen an comes < and possiblyand injure themselves. thesunroof operate could children otherwise, leave thecar; you you thekey with when Take until it vision field isyour of shut. Access, refertopage Access, lock door or Comfort via operation Convenient pletely. com- sunroofs both closes again switch the on tilted. Pressing is glasssunroof rear The tion. posi- tilted a in remains sunroof glass front The by pressing the switch forward. way thesame in be closed can glasssunroof The stops theswitch movement. the Releasing sunroofis closed. rearglass The front glasssunroof opens. The there. hold it and backward tilted, switch press roof the sun- glass the and on switched ignition the With closing Opening, > > Tilting sunroof, electric* Glass Pressing again themovement. stops again Pressing fully. tilted are sunroofs closed Both point. the resistance beyond switch backward ignitionWith on,press switched the the movement. the stops switch the Releasing aretilted. sunroofs glass Both there. it hold and point theresistance to backward theswitch Press closing the glass sunroof and keep it in and keep theglasssunroof closing when injuries, care exercise To prevent 28 , 29 , 33 < . engine running. engine orthe on switched ignition the with minutes eral sev- for cool system the Let overheated. is tem sys- the opened, not and be only closed can dow selves. the electric windowsand possiblyinjure them- operate could children otherwise, car; the leave with when you you theremote control Take Windows done by your MINI dealer. work this have you that recommends MINI your of initialized. Themanufacturer thesystem have thiscase, In betilted. can only sunroof glass the that possibility a is there failure, power a After power supply electrical in interruptions Following sunroof. glass the of independently closed and opened roller canbe sunblind The blind sun Roller > > Opening again to stop the opening movement. theopening stop to again windows switch the the Tap automatically. open will ready, is remote the as soon As downward. switch the Tap switch. the until you opens release window The downward. switch the Press several inseveral closetimes succession, thewin- closed and If, is opened awindow after thewindows. closing when injuries, care exercise To prevent < < 35
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Opening and closing contact your MINI dealer. MINI your contact please malfunction, ofasystem theevent In 3. 2. 1. possible. not is top convertible the opening Convertible: MINI will windows bethe lowered. not reinitialize the power window switch; otherwise, Initializing Initializing power windows electric switch. the release you until closes window The up. press window, theswitch order In to close the MINI Convertible: closing switch up. the pressing by be way in can window closed the same The MINI: closing 36 and hold. upward thebutton push closethewindow, To > > unit window power central Convertible: MINI Close both windows. Open both windows. doors. the Close movement. opening the stop to again switch the Tap automatically. open dow frontwin- rearand on: turned ignition With Tapthe switch downward. is released. until thebutton open dows frontwin- the then therearwindows, First switch downward. Press the changing batteries or vehicle storage, orvehicle storage, batteries changing e.g. for wasdisconnected, thebattery If < pinch protection system impaired. system be could protection pinch the Otherwise, movement. with window fere inter- thatmight accessories any not install Do closing. tinue con- would thewindow and objects, asthin such obstructions, of kinds certain detect to fail might system safety the otherwise, is clear; path travel slightly. reopens the window and is interrupted closing action closes, the window a as value specific a exceeds force the closing If vertible. Con- totheMINI notapply does function This system protection pinch MINI: selves. electric windows and possibly injure them- opened. is door no as long minute as 1 forapprox. stillcan operated be off, thewindows theignition is switched When After switching offthe ignition 2. 1. manually. closed normally, be can thewindow windows the closing from you prevents etc., windows, danger, thereis iceIf or external if an onthe pinch protection without Closing refer to page to refer top, Convertible top. of seals convertible the therubber against will close properly windows side the that ensured not itis Otherwise, ished. window closes without pinch protection. closes without window The there. it hold and seconds 4 approx. within upward again switch Press the a certain value. slightly reopens exceeds theclosing if force window the and limited is protection Pinch hold switch upward it and Press the there. system, always ensure that the window's thewindow's system, alwaysensurethat protection thereis thepinch though Even the operate could children car; otherwise, the leave you when you with key the Take procedure for the convertible top is fin- top convertible the for procedure closing the until windows close the not Do < 38 . < < hampered. theclosing of thetop be may otherwise, frame; windshield the from debris all remove and for check top, theconvertible toclosing Prior is running. engine > tips: aresomehelpful Convertible, here MINI your outof enjoyment most the get you can So that operation. easy and simple with theweather, combined from protection provides top convertible automatic fully The top Power convertible km/h. 120 / mph 74 of speed road a to up operated be can sunroof sliding The switch forward.Press the To close: is ortheend reached. position tion posi- desired until the backward switch the Press To open: the sliding and closing Opening sunroof sunroof sliding integrated with Convertible top convertible top is closed. is top convertible the if even compartment, luggage locked Always keep your valuables inside the theft. against protection of degree certain unforeseen bad weather, but also providesa to due damage from interior vehicle the only protects top not convertible closed The is parked. thevehicle whenever top vertible It is recommendedthat youclose the con- operate the convertible top only while the the while only top convertible the operate To conserve battery power, if possible < > > and closing opening Before damaged. be may thevehicle otherwise, m; ft/2 is 7 ance clear- minimum ensure the low similar structure, or abridge, under or garage a inside top vertible top while the vehicle is standing. whilethevehicle top convertible the operate only reasons, safety For top. convertible the of range pivoting the from away children Keep closing procedure. and opening the parts during moving into the not reach Do injury. personal or damage toproperty lead can is finished completely procedure closing or opening an before off Driving top. convertible ofthe theoperation finish completely Always top. theconvertible operate not do extended, is system protective rollover the If or injury. personal damage erty prop- in result and operated being is top vertible fall while thecon- off otherwise could as they top, convertible the on objects any place not Do cause damages. moreone than day, since thehumidity may for top open wetconvertible notleave a Do top; otherwise, damage may occur. > > cannot be opened. be cannot page roller is in cover its to lowestposition, refer compartment ensuretheluggage Please tions. instruc- theprevioussafety observe Please necessary. if compartment, theluggage from objects all orsoiling, stains water remove avoid to order In compartment. luggage the enter may drops water rain, the in driving after e.g., top, convertible wet the opening When top. convertible any rack systemsonthe notmount roof Do top pivots upward. If operating the con- the operating If upward. pivots top closing, theconvertible and opening While –12 +10 below drops temperature the If 103 < 6 , do not operate the convertible convertible the operate not , do ; otherwise, the convertible top theconvertible ; otherwise, < 7 37 /
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Opening and closing Opening and the and Opening closing top convertible > > 38 > > > control better For tions. condi- windy orduring roads rough and winding driving on top when theconvertible operate Do not movement. convertible top's the during limited is the rear very vehicle view since the reversing while top convertible the operating to avoid Try happen. may an accident otherwise, km/h. mph/30 20 than faster not driving while orclosed opened be may top convertible The whiledriving Operating theswitch forward Press To close: top. convertible the opens again button the Pressing sunroof. sliding/tilting inthe order to open backward theswitch Press To open: Make sure that the liftgate is closed. liftgate surethat the Make below. from rollercover compartment luggage the against notpush does thecargo Ensure on the Control Display. Control the on lightslocked is up a and indicated message not top Convertible lamp indicator The button. theappropriate ing press- by direction desired the in continued be can procedure The completed. been yet not has procedure orclosing opening The switch. the releasing after flashes LED The cedure is completelyfinished. pro- orclosing theopening until operation top convertible up lights during LED The < close attention to the surrounding traffic; traffic; tothesurrounding attention close While operatingthe convertibletop, pay down for approx. minutes. 4 tocool Allow thesystem hasoverheated. tem sys- top theconvertible it, tooperate attempts the convertible top cannot be opened. be cannot top convertible the or lowered be cannot windows the Otherwise, topage refer windows, power reinitialize the 2. 1. again: top theconvertible in order case, to operate this In blockage. mechanical a of case in rupted is alsointer- procedure closing and opening The button. appropriate the by pressing tinued con- be can procedure The position. stable more it before seconds a slowlyseveral moves into staysin its top for current position convertible the button, respective the releasing by rupted is inter- procedure closing or theopening If button. appropriate the desired by pressing direction in the continued be can procedure is released. operation The top convertible for the whenthebutton rupted automaticThe is movement immediately inter- could be damaged. top mechanism ortheconvertible another, Interruption lock, refertopage refertopage trol, con- remote the using operation convenient For operation Convenient procedure closing and Opening in the desired direction. desired the in procedure the tocontinue button Press the again. it on switch then and theignition off Switch one direction after several consecutive direction several consecutive after one only in moved be can top theconvertible If changing batteries or vehicle storage, orvehicle storage, batteries changing e.g. for wasdisconnected, the battery If open or closed is hazardous. orclosed open completely not is which top convertible A procedure several oneafter several times procedure theclosing restart and notinterrupt Do 27 29 < ; for operation via the door via the ; foroperation . < < < 36 . age or injury could result. could injury or age completelyOtherwise, dam- finished. be must procedure The closing damage. in result can top convertible the of handling Improper manually. 3. 1. Closing the convertible top 2. 1. Releasing the convertible top 3. 2. 1. closing Before malfunction electrical intheManual closing event ofan Release the second frame. side thesecond Release the frame. side the respective top on ontheconvertible hands both Place arrows see devices, locking the of screws the loosen to key allen the use top theconvertible tounlock In order seearrow cover forward, panel Push arrow. the of direction the in ahalf turns oneand screw,seearrow, ored turnthegold-col- and screwdriver Use the thescrewdriver. using trim side left the from lamp compartment outluggage Pry tools,topage vehicle refer Remove allenkey and screwdriverfrom it is absolutely necessary. Never open it open Never necessary. absolutely is it if manually top convertible the close Only < 197 2 . . 1 . 1. sunroof sliding the To close 2. 4. 3. 3. 2. arrow see pushupward, oftheroofand center the in therecess wrench into hexagon Insert the arrow arrow of direction in the wrench hexagon the Turn the the cowl, seearrow. recess in thepins therespective Insert into pieces. locking the bothOpen locking and remove mechanisms out the cover in thecenter of theroof. topry vehicle, useascrewdriver Inside the cowl. the onto top forward theconvertible swing and sides thesame time, outboth Lift at 1 2 . . 39
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Opening and closing Wind deflector* locked. arrow of direction in theopposite wrench hexagon Turn the To lock convertible top 40 up folding and Installing 3. 2. 1. Before installing objects. deflector, ensure that it is not damaged by wind the stowing When deflector. wind installed the on objects notplace Do net. the damage speeds. drive, at higher pleasant even a more with you thusproviding toaminimum, partment com- passenger in airthe movement tor keeps deflec- thewind top open, theconvertible With engages, see arrow seearrow 2. engages, it until together device locking the Press seearrows deflector, thewind Unfold outof pouch. the deflector thewind Take the electrical malfunction repaired. electrical malfunction the contact Please toyour MINI dealer have contact with pointy objects as these may asthesemay objects pointy with contact into come deflector thewind not let Do < 2 until the convertible top is securely issecurely top convertible the until < 1 . 1. wind deflector and fold both halves together. halves both fold and deflector wind of the the center thereleaselevertoward Push sequence. thereverse following thedeflector Remove folding and Removing wind deflector could be damaged. be could deflector wind 4. 3. 2. 5. Push out retaining pin outretaining Push Push out retaining pin outretaining Push against the spring load. pin retaining the On the opposite side of the vehicle, insert vehicle. openings the into pins with deflector retaining wind Insert engages. Fold up the upper part of the wind up part Fold theupper deflector. of wind the engages. recline the backrest too far; otherwise, the otherwise, toofar; thebackrest recline aseatisIf not in position, its do rearmost 1 and and 1 into the opening, pushing pushing theopening, into 2 on that side side the onthat of 2 2 on oneside until it on oneside until it < on airbags, refer to page information additional and locations airbag For Thisuals. is effect temporary. usually only loss hearing mild in sensitive extremely individ- a provoke may noise inflation and ignition The on the depending circumstances. excluded, fully be cannot withairbags contact from resulting injuries instructions, the all follow you if Even gered. is airbag trig- injuries can when the wise occur other- theMINI; in airbag thehead-level against notlean do and airbag theside from away their heads keep surethatoccupants Make deployed. suddenly airbag front the dashboard. Otherwise, leginjury couldresult if the against nofeet legs arepropped or that e.g. seated, is correctly thefrontpassenger that area.Ensure asastorage side passenger front the on airbag of front the cover notusethe Do airbags and the seat occupant. the between should come nothing oneand No off. triggered being airbag the of event the in orarms tothehands injury therisk of minimize to positions, o'clock 9 and 3o'clock in the hands your with onthe rim, wheel thesteering grip Airbags refer safely, page to dren chil- ontransporting information additional For ing section. follow- the in contained instructions the observe to urgeyou westrongly efficiency, optimal with operate systems safety the that ensure To dent. anacci- of theevent in safety your on influence hasa major position theseated the airbags, and junction with the safety belts, the head restraints bution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con- contri- vital a make can position sitting ideal The Sitting safely Adjustments between yourself andthe airbags. Always Always maintain an adequate distance < 80 47 . . Safety belts,Safety topage refer be impaired. itscould effect restraining otherwise, taut; area ing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body cloth- bulky wearing Avoid abdomen. the injure and collision frontal a of event the in hips the over slide could belt the Otherwise, twists. any without body snugly the fitting shoulder, and lap the across taut pulled is it that so belt safety the Fasten orbepinched. objects or hard fragile pass edges, over runacross sharp throat, the belt The safety mustnotrestagainst abdomen. across the hips and does not press against the surethatMake the inbelt the lap sits area low lap. passenger's in toride orsmall a children infants Number of safetybelts they do not represent a substitute. but device, safety asanadditional belt safety the their belts. safety complement Airbags wear all occupants surethat make drive, every Before Safety belt refertopage restraints, Head accident. ofan event the in injury of risk increased an is there erwise, anaccident. of theevent injury ofneck in risk the reduces restraint head A correctly adjusted Head restraint wear awear single safety belt. Never allow to one person morethan allow Never that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth- level. ear atapprox. is center its that away such in restraint head the Adjust < < 44 . 43 . 41
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Adjustments tion. on page onpage height restraint head on instructions the with Comply mally provided by the belt. nor- protection the eliminating belt, safety the of sliding under anaccident of theevent ger in thereis adan- otherwise, driven; is being vehicle the while totherear toofar backrest the incline not do aswell, seat thefrontpassenger On accident. lead control toan could loss ofvehicle ensuing respondwith unexpected movement, and the forward or back so that it engages properly. theseatslightly move lever, the releasing After arrows position, desired Note before adjusting Seats 42 Pull the lever, arrow Longitudinal adjustment adjustment Seat < ensure the best possible personal protec- Observe the instructions theinstructions on page Observe could seat The vehicle is moving. the seat while your toadjust attempt Never 45 . 43 and on damaged safety belts belts safety damaged on and 1 , and slide the seat into the the into seat the slide and , 2 . < 42 to Backrest arrows arrows Pull the up lever down or repeatedly, push Height vature. cur- the ordecrease to increase thewheel Turn position. sitting upright relaxed, plementarysupport to helpyou maintaina The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- region. thelumbar in support additional obtain to backrest the of contour the adjust also can You Lumbar support* arrow lever, Pull the the backrest or backrest lift arrows the off,asnecessary, it 2 1 . , until is thedesired height reached, 1 , and apply your weight to 2 . dent due to unexpected movement. tounexpected due dent acci- riskof a is there Otherwise, backrests. seat and seats front the engage off, driving Before property damage. 2. 1. adjustment. backrest and the setting fortheforward/back function memory hasamechanical seat driver's The Return seat to original position 1. inback Getting 2. Fold the backrest back up to theseat. up lock to back thebackrest Fold position manually, page longitudinal the adjust case, this In tion. posi- current its in engage will seat the wise, tion. posi- starting its to return to seat the Slide arrow backrest, seat onthe upthelever Pull backrest, arrow backrest, the on pushing by forward seat the Move forward. folds backrest The that you do not injury do you personal or not cause that ensure theseatbackward, moving When seat seat itsis in previous position. Other- up until the notfold backrest the Do 1 . 2 . 42 . < < Height adjustment Height ofthehead. theback to as close as possible restraint is head sothat the thedistance Adjust Distance approximately at ear level. center sothat is restraint its thehead Adjust Height accident. an in injury of risk increased anaccident. of theevent injury ofneck in risk the reduces restraint head A correctly adjusted Correctly adjusted restraints Head tion. func- its protective provide cannot restraint in question. seat the on sitting restraint no onewill if head remove a Only be Removing down. restraint head the arrow button, the press lower: To To raise: pull up. < occupied seats; otherwise, is an seats;otherwise, there occupied ofall restraints thehead adjust Correctly porting passengers, as otherwise the head head the as otherwise passengers, porting trans- before restraint thehead Reinstall head restraint head 1 , and , and slide < 43
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Adjustments 44 heating* Seat 2. 1. Rear 4. 3. 2. 1. MINI Convertible: front 4. 3. 2. 1. MINI: front 5. out completely. out button Press Pull up as far itas will go. button press Additionally out as asfar it will go. button Press Fold the backrest forward slightly. Pull up as far itas will go. backrest. the back Fold out as asfar it will go. button Press Fold the backrest forward slightly. Pull up as far itas will go. Fold back the backrest. the back Fold out completely. restraint head 1 1 1 and pull the head restraint pullhead the and restraint pullhead the and and pull the head restraint pullhead the and 2 and pull the the pull and they do not represent asubstitute. notrepresent do they but device, safety asanadditional belt safety the their belts. complement safety Airbags wear all occupants surethat drive, make every Before tion. Safety belts longer. button Press off Switching The LEDs stay lit. battery. the on drain the reduce to entirely off switched ortheheating is is lowered temperature The thepreviously at set temperature. utes,the seat heating is automatically activated within next15min- driving continue you If the temperature. highest the indicate LEDs Three level. temperature once for each Press on Switching erly, page any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop- of adults for suitable is anchor belt upper The buckle. in hear the belt sureyou thelock engage Make Closing Front and rear seats < ensure the best possible personal protec- Observe the instructions theinstructions on page Observe 42 . 42 to their safety belts. their or ger seat, if driver unfasten or frontpassenger on thefront ifpassen- areplaced objects tened, been safety beltfas- passenger's has not front the if km/h 8 or mph 5 approx. above speeds atroad activated isalso reminder belts" safety "Fasten The fastened. belt hasnotbeen safety is reminder whenthedriver's issued belts" safety "Fasten correctly. The fastened been seat belts.seat safety systems is not ensured. not is systems safety ofthese operation correct otherwise, facturer; manu- oftheMINI thespecifications with dance working in personnel trained specially accor- has that workshop a by or dealer MINI a by only out work carried this Have checked. anchors belt and its seat-belt tensioners replaced and the Damage tosafety belts Front seats Safety belt reminder MINI Convertible: rear belt guide 3. 2. 1. Opening Guide thebelt into reel.Guide its buckle. inthe button red Press the Grasp the beltfirmly. arrow, is locked when putting ontherear arrow, whenputting is locked belt loop, ensurethat guide the Please in an accident: have the safety belt system system belt safety the have accident: an in If thesafety belts are damaged or stressed play. Check whether the safety belt has belt has the safety whether Check play. Dis- ontheControl appears message a Inaddition, sounds. signal acoustic The indicator lamps onand come an < < 2 1 dent. risk ofanacci- thereis an increased otherwise, youseein themirror;you onthe basis of what behind fromtraffic distance your notgauge Do they themirrorappear. arecloser than seen in Exterior mirrors Mirrors switched on. switched ignition the or running is engine the while heated areautomatically mirrors exterior both At outside temperatures below a certain limit, Automatic heating* direction Turn the knob beyond the pressure point in mirrors Folding in and out* glass. the of edge the The manually: also bemirrors can press adjusted Manual adjustment in by hand back out into their correct positions. correct their into out back hand by in folded that were mirrors orformoving example, in can beneficial narrow This streets, for be km/h. mph/30 toapprox. up speeds 20 Folding out in and Folding mirrors mirror or theleft exterior right Adjusting < vex thedriver's mirror.vex than The objects mirror is frontpassenger's more con- The 2 . The mirrors can be folded in at road road at in folded be can mirrors . The * 45
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Adjustments Interior rearview mirror rearview Interior 46 > > > function: proper For > > photosensors: istwo by controlled It dimming feature* automatic Interior and exterior mirrors, Turn the knob. atnight: are driving you when you behind vehicles glarefrom reduce To shield in front of the in frontof mirror. the shield Do not place stickers or decals on the wind- windshield the and mirror rearview theinterior between thearea notcover Do clean the photosensors Keep back themirror.On the of mirror, arrow rearview interior Inside the 3. 2. 1. ment. move- anunexpected to due risk ofaccident is a Adjustments wheel Steering will be damaged. up. theleverback Swing tion. tosuit angle posi- seated your and distance Move the steering wheel to the preferred Fold the lever down. < while the car is in motion; otherwise, there there otherwise, motion; in is car the while steering position wheel notadjust the Do back up; otherwise, the mechanism themechanism up;back otherwise, lever toswing the notuseforce Do < doors, forexample. doors, the opening by persons other and/or themselves of the front passenger airbags, refer to page to refer airbags, passenger front the of deactivation automatic on information more For system. restraint child a in seated is child the evenif deploy, the child theairbags if injury to of risk increased an is there Otherwise, vated. deacti- mustbe side and airbags seat, front the Front passenger airbags seat for passenger front Exception dent. ofan risk ofinjuryacci- in the event increased is there an Otherwise, engaged. and back their size weight. age, priate for and longer is any child restraint system that is appro- assoonthereno belt asafety in led with buck- mustbe orolder of years age 13 Children dent. ofan risk ofinjuryacci- in the event increased thereis size. an and Otherwise, weight suitablein system a restraint theirchild age, for is onthe rear children seat. for place thatthe safest hasshown research Accident Children should alwa children The right place for Transporting children safely < < vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger endanger could they otherwise, vehicle; inthe unattended children notleave Do restraint system on the front passenger passenger systemonthefront restraint it betouseachild Should necessary rear seat backrest is folded all the way when the rear in the seats child install Only in therear cm ft/150 13 orsmaller 5 than of theage under children transport Only < ys sit in the rear < 81 . this. after seatposition the notchange Do belt. the position possible for thebest to obtain possible increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy. airbags the if injury of risk increased is otherwise, there an deactivated; ger are passen- forthefront airbags side and front the ished. Otherwise,the protective effectmaydimin- be systems. using restraint child and installing Seat position On the front passenger seat installation Child restraintsystems, tems. sys- outin secure order pulled restraint child to being from be prevented can passenger front All rear safety safety belt and for the belts the Child seat security up far and seat back passenger as front the installing Before a system, child restraint move < the front passenger seat, make sure that seat,sure that make passenger the front system on restraint achild After installing selecting, when instructions facturer's child systemmanu- the Observe restraint * 47 < as
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Transporting children safely To To unlock the safety belt belt is safety locked. The 3. 2. 1. belt safety the lock To 48 seatthe may be compromised. of function theprotective otherwise, backrest; theseat systemrestsfirmly restraint against are located behind the labeled protective caps. anchors LATCH forthelower points anchor The system. fixing child thearea restraint for the of Beforeinstalling the child seat, pullthebelt out anchors LATCH for points Anchor mayseat be compromised. the of function the protective otherwise, system; ofthe themanufacturer by provided instructions CHildren. Tethersfor and Anchors lower LATCH: system ing fix- restraint child LATCH 3. 2. 1. against the child restraint system. thechild restraint against ittaut pull and toretract strap thebelt Allow out. way the all strap belt the Pull belt. the restraint with thechild system Secure way. all the toretract strap belt safety the Allow thechildrestraint system. Remove buckle. the belt Open are properly engaged and that the the child and that properly engaged are lower anchors sure both LATCH Make that safety and theoperating follow system, restraint child theLATCH use install and To < < restraint system in the event of an of an systeminrestraint accident. the event wise, the strap notproperlysecurewill thechild asit Other- thetop passes anchor. to twisted straps, systemswith restraint arrows. tether forchild anchors aretwo additional There anchors couldbe damaged. Placement ofthetether strap restraintChild system with tether strap 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MINI Tether strap of the child restraint restraint system thechild strap of Tether backrest Seat Anchor Rear cargo well strap hook Tether restraint Head Direction of travel not run over sharp edges and is not not is and edges sharp over run not strap does retaining suretheupper Make the otherwise, systemsonly; restraint child tosecure anchors tetherstrap the Use < < over protection system member cross system with protection over 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 system. restraint child the secure will not properly the strap otherwise, MINI Convertible 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Tether strap of the child restraint thechild system strap of restraint Tether backrest Seat Anchor strap hook Tether Rear cargo well Cargo areacover ber mem- cross with system protection Rollover restraint Head Direction of travel Pull the retaining tight. strap theretaining Pull hook. the using anchor strap to the tether the Attach position. lowermost intoits restraint thehead Push hook. the using anchor strap to the tether the Attach holders.restraint head the between strap thetether Guide upward. restraint thehead Push between theseatbackrest between Ensure that the upper strap upper that the Ensure < 8 9 andthe roll- is passed passed is 3 ; 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Pull the retaining tight. strap theretaining Pull headrest downas far possible. as backrest back and Fold lock in place. Push hook. the using anchor strap to the thetether Attach holders.restraint head the between strap thetether Guide refer to page to refer Unlock backrest and slightly fold forward, upward. restraint thehead Push 103 . 49
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Driving Inserting the the Inserting key into theignitionlock Ignition lock Driving 50 so. while doing orclutch brake the notdepress off.Do onand ness or the ignition readi- radio switch to button Start/Stop the Press Start/Stop button is in positionP:interlock. lever selector if the removed be only can key The Automatic transmission > time: same the At slightly. ejected It is briefly. key the in Press lock keyfrom theignition the Removing can operate. consumers electrical Individual Radio readiness lock. ignition the into theway all thekey Insert beforehand. on was it if off switched is ignition The > > as thefollowing: such situations in off switched not is ignition The on. back theignition switches again button theStart/Stop is Pressing opened. door driver's > sumers in order to preserve the the battery. order topreserve in sumers time. > > automatically: off switched is readiness Radio tachometer. the aredisplayed in temperature outside and time Individual electrical co Radio readiness The ignition automatically turnsoff automatically ignition The go out. displays the in lamps warning and indicator All Radio readinessand ignition off area indicator in lamps warning and indicator Most on Ignition automatic transmission, the engine starts. engine the transmission, automatic mission or the brake pedal is depressed in the The low beams are switched on switched are beams low The The clutch or brake is depressed After a certain has elapsed has certain a After Locking on page orthe thedoor handle on button the When using Comfort usingWhen Access lock When the key is removed from the ignition 1 tion and any unnecessary electrical con- electrical unnecessary any and tion igni- the off switch off, is engine the When clutch is depressed in the manual trans- in isclutch themanual depressed whilethe is pressed button thestart/stop If , page button on the remote ontheremote control, button refer to 13 , light up for varying lengths of of lengths , light up for varying 33 nsumers can operate. The operate. nsumers can * by pushing pushing by * when the when < < accelerator pedal. accelerator the notdepress engine, do the When starting speed. engine ate at astandstill. Moveoff immediately at amoder- vehicle the with up warm theengine notlet Do alytic converter. thecat- damaging and ofoverheating a danger is there and burned or inadequately burned not fuel is the Otherwise, start. not does engine the moving. from car the prevent to brake parking the apply forcefully P and toposition lever selector the in transmission place neutral or move ning, the engine is run- thecar the while leaving Before hazard. safety potential a sents repre- such avehicle running; otherwise, engine the with vehicle anunattended leave Never gas. toxic highly but and colorless, anodorless oxide, mon- carbon gases contain Exhaust death. and gases can to exhaust lead loss of consciousness 3. 2. 1. refertopage fort Access, Com- with vehicle or inside lock ignition in Key transmission Manual engine the Starting Press the Start/Stop button. Start/Stop the Press clutch. the Depress Depress the brake. sion or repeated start attempts in which inwhich attempts start or repeated sion in starting quick succes- Avoid frequent areas; otherwise,inhalation of the noxious enclosed in run to engine the allow not Do < < 33 . fully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll. to begin could the vehicle otherwise, fully; When parking, apply the parking brake force- 3. 2. 1. Manual transmission off Switching the engine has started. engine the as soon as automatically stops and time, foracertain automatically starteroperates The 3. 2. 1. refertopage fort Access, Keyin ignition lock or inside vehicle withCom- Automatic transmission* brakes therearwheels. brakes it fromrolling while parked; thevehicle vent topre- intended brake is primarily parking The brake Parking 4. 3. 2. 1. roll: is able to thevehicle steps, these following By driving Before into acar wash 3. 2. 1. Automatic transmission* Forcefully apply the parking brake. orreverse. intofirst gear Shift button. Stop car With at pressthe a standstill, theStart/ button. Start/Stop the Press P or N. theselector leverinto Shift position Depress the brake. Switch off engine. off the Switch positionN. to selector lever the Move Depress the brake. lock. theignition in Access, evenwith Comfort control, the Place remote Forcefully apply the parking brake. button. Start/Stop the Press P. toposition lever With thecar at astop, move theselector leave the vehicle. thevehicle. leave Always take the key with you when you 33 . 51 <
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Driving ently shift shift ently 3rd or4thgear. into inadvert- ifyou damaged be could engine the Releasing The lever locks in position automatically. Applying 52 overcome. hastobe slight resistance a left, tothe pressed leveris thegearshift When is stationary. thevehicle this onlySelect when gear Reverse transmission Manual rear axle. at the fishtailing, i.e. traction, of loss and braking over- to lead could force excessive Otherwise, lever. brake parking ofthe thebutton press tinuously pull toohard. so,con-not doing the lever up In lever. the Pull slightly lower and press upward, the button the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise, Otherwise, right. the to lever gearshift the press gear, 6th or 5th into shifting When has to be used to slow toslow tobe thecar, used or stop has do brake parking ifthe cases, exceptional In < < running. engine the with the vehicle leaving before brake P R N D M/S R M/S N P + – D positions lever Selector refertopage lock, theignition from switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the key then P and intoposition lever theselector move first lock, ignition the from key the remove To key the Removing Parking the vehicle page Steptronic, using gears manually shift can you mode, automatic fully the to addition In with Steptronic Automatic transmission* > > Changing selector lever positions themanual mode. gear in current selector or leverposition is The displayed, the P R N D DS M1 to M6 Displays inthe tachometer refuse move:shiftlock. refuse to lever will selector the otherwise, brake; the depress first stationary, vehicle the with N Por from away thelever moving Before is running. or theengine on ignition is switched the Pwhen position outof moved canonly be lever selector The eetpsto P and apply the parking select position fromrolling, always vehicle the prevent To < 50 . 53 . lever positions R and P. R and lever positions selector into shifting accidental prevents lock A throttle resistance point. resistance throttle Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the full- performance. you maximum enables to achieve Kickdown Kickdown D. in whenyoudrive is lowest position sumption conditions, fuelcon- operation normal Under automatically. areselected gears ward All operation. for- vehicle fornormal Position D Drive, automatic position ple. The vehicle can roll. exam- for wash, car a in are you when this Select N Neutral vehicle isstationary. the onlywhen Select this R Reverse turning. from wheels thedrive toprevent locks transmission The vehicle isstationary. the onlywhen Select this P Park lever, arrow. theselector of onthefront button Press the Overriding the selector lever lock start. to areready you until brake the depress < after you select a driving position, position, adriving select you after fromcreeping thevehicle prevent To nopsto D. position into right the to lever selector the move M/S, mode manual or program sport the deactivate To style. driving formance-oriented played. This position is recommended for a per- DS is dis- and is activated Sportprogram The left theM/S into shifting slot: tothe D position from lever selector the Move M/S operation manual and program Sport matically switches to manual mode. auto- transmission The wheel. steering the on you drive, can gearsusing shift the shift paddles automatic D, inposition lever theselector With onthe Shifting steering wheel* gear. current the is displaselected gear The thesystem. by notbe rev will executed toover- theengine cause that would downshift thus, a example, speed; vehicle for and engine of combination plausible a in result will they only when areexecuted downshifts and Upshifts lever position theright D. selector into to the again, move mode automatic the To use M1. e.g. meter, thetacho- is selected displayed in gear The > > gear. the shifts Steptronic operation. manual activate Push the selector lever forward or pull it back to Shifting with the selector lever Transmission shiftsTransmission down. theselector leverinPush the – direction. shiftsTransmission up. direction. + the in lever selector the Pull yed briefly, followed by 53
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Driving M1 through M6 are displayed in the tachometer. the in displayed are M6 through M1 > > matic drive. returnstoD, auto- automatically transmission the of time, amount foracertain accelerate or paddles theshift with gears shift donot you If 54 2. 1. can be overridden: lock lever selector the pressed, is lever selector the on button the and depressed is brake the on, ignition is switched though the Peven position theselector of moveout lever refuse Should to lock lever selector the releasing Manually 3. 4. Transmission shiftsTransmission down. oneof paddles. the shift Push shiftsTransmission up. paddles. shift oneofthe Pull cable connector if necessary. the Disconnect out. is inside sleeve the until lever theselector up thesleeve over Pull theselector lever. sleeve the of Unclip Insert extractor hook extractor Insert Pull the loop up. loop the Pull side. ger's on thepassen- loop the into kit tool vehicle 1 from the onboard edapflasher headlamp Turn signals/ 3. 2. 1. or three times. once flashes turnsignal the whether set can You point. asfar thelever astheresistance Press Triple turn signal activation as long as you wish to indicate a turn. for point asfarthe resistance thelever Press Indicating a turn briefly failed. point. tance theresis- thelever to manually, press turnoff To theresistance thelever beyond point. Press signals turn Using 2 1 away. roll may thevehicle otherwise, to towing; brake prior theparking apply tofirmly forget not 5. "Triple turnsignal" "Lighting" "Settings" flasher Headlamp signal Turn of the selector lever. selector of the front onthe button the pressing by position lever thedesired into selector the Move < lamp indicates that an indicator bulb has has bulb indicator that an indicates lamp indicator of rapid flashing the Unusually only when the vehicle is to be towed. towed. Do istobe vehicle whenthe only lock lever selector the release Manually < for the remote control currently in use. in currently control remote the for vehicle is stationary. is vehicle the when speed to normal switches system The point. resistance the beyond or press twice Press Fast wiper speed is stationary. thevehicle when operation intermittent system to switches The once. Press Normal wiper speed whenreleased. tion posi- itsinitial returnsto automatically lever The lever upward, arrow Press the Switching on wipers 4 3 2 1 Wiper system Triple turn signaling is switched on and stored stored and on switched is signaling turn Triple Cleaning Cleaning headlamps and windshield or rain sensor mode intermittent Activating/deactivating Switching off wipers or brief wipe Switching on wipers * 1 . * Press button, arrow button, Press sensor Activating intermittent wipe or rain mirror. rearview oftheinterior front in directly windshield, the on mounted is sensor rain The rainfall. the of intensity the on depends betweenwipes is controlledautomatically and time sensor,the rain a with equipped is car the If preset. is time intermittent-wipe the arainsensor, with thecar equipped is not If Intermittent wipe or rain sensor* wiper activation. wiper by undesired resultincould caused damage 1. sensor Adjusting the sensitivity oftherain 2. 3. Switch on the ignition, refer topage refer ignition, onthe Switch played. is dis- until "SET/INFO" lever repeatedly turnsignal in Briefly pressthe thebutton changes. display the until button the hold and Press an automatic car wash. Failure to do so todo so Failure carwash. an automatic entering sensorbefore rain the Deactivate meter. tacho- the in displayed is symbol This < 3 . 50 . 55
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Driving 4. 56 open. is thehood when cleaned be cannot headlamps with alarmsystem, carsequipped an the In intervals. appropriate and atregular cleaned are headlamps the on, switched is system lighting vehicle the When operated wipers briefly. are the Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and Pull thelever,arrow headlamps* and windshield Cleaning once, arrow downward thelever Press Brief wipe arrow again, thebutton Press sensor Deactivating intermittent wipe rain or 5. 7. 6. symbol and "SET" are displayed. repeatedly press thebutton until Briefly the changes. until thedisplay button Press hold the and The settings stored. settings are The display changes. the until thebutton and hold press or Wait, tivity. sensi- toselect button thedesired Press the 4 . 3 . 2 . ignition is switched on. switched is ignition freeze. reason, useanti- For be could this obscured. onthewindshield. freeze do, you If vision your any dangerwashers thatthe fluidif there will is MINI: rear window wiper matically auto- nozzlesareheated washer window The Window washer nozzles 2 rear the window Cleaning 1 0 damage the pump. washer 3 interval stage is in cap if move the does rearwiper not The on. system washer pletely closed; theheadlamp otherwise, com- been has hood the if washers use the Only damage the pump. washer etwp : level to further cap the Turn wipe tent intermit- during the rear window To clean : tolevel cap the Turn To switch on intermittentwipe parked wipers Rear akd: tolevel cap the Turn parked are whenwipers therear window To clean there. in reverse gear. is continuous Operation fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will is you empty; reservoir fluid otherwise, washer the when not use the washers Do fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will is you empty; reservoir fluid otherwise, washer the when notusethe washers Do < * * may be damaged. Do not usethe while the engine is runningorthe 1 before the ignition is switched switched is ignition the before 1 3 . and it and there. hold < 2 and hold it hold and the correct concentrationismaintained. mendations. recom- tomanufacturer's according antifreeze, Fill if with and, a required,water washer with safety. sonal arisk toper- and spills hazard constitute a fire parts. fluid Otherwise, engine with hot contact tainer. con- the on instructions the with Comply injury. thereisof adanger otherwise, of children; closed, original container, andkeep out of reach prx . Sqat/. liters. quarts/4.5 US 4.8 Approx. system: headlamp washer With liters. quarts/2.5 US Approx. 2.6 Capacity reservoir fluid Washer Washer fluid the washer fluid reservoir to make sure sure make to reservoir fluid washer the filling before antifreeze and thewater Mix freeze when the engine is cool, to avoid refillanti- contains fluid Only washer that storeit sources, inonly from ignition the it Keep away fluid is flammable. Washer < < < Activating result. a as anaccident cause and ofthevehicle trol couldor loosesurfaces. you Otherwise, losecon- ice rain, snow, e.g., to, due conditions road poor traffic or e.g.winding dense conditions, roads, wheel. onthe steering thebutton using specify you that speed the maintains and stores km/h. The car then mph or 30 20 least approx. ofat speeds vehicle at available is control Cruise The concept Cruise control* > > > > vated: deacti- isautomatically thesystem addition, In button Press control cruise Activating/deactivating vated. cruise control system is ready be can and acti- lights up. The in thespeedometer lamp Indicator 4 3 2 1 active is system control stability driving the When N lever position tion selec- is in transmission theautomatic When depressed is clutch the When applied are brakes the When speed decreasing and storing Maintaining, speed increasing and storing Maintaining, control cruise Activating/deactivating cruise Resuming control constant speed is prevented by adverse adverse by is prevented speed constant driving at control when notusecruise Do < 2 . 57
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Driving drop if the engine output is insufficient. is output engine the if drop may speed vehicle grades uphill On exceeded. be may speed thecontrolled sufficient, is not If, braking on adownhill grade, effect engine the speed. vehicle storesthe current and maintains system The switched off. switched is ignition when the is cleared speed stored The maintained. and again stored is last achieved The speed decreased. be will speed the that except oraccelerating, thespeed ing sameasfor increas- here are the functions The reached. is speed 2km/h. mph or 1 approx. increases by ton, speed the thebut- you press Every time is reached. speed button Press speed current Maintaining off. switched is ignition when the is cleared speed stored The and maintained. again is speed achieved pedal is thestored released, theaccelerator Once pedal. accelerator the depressing by is notdeactivated control Cruise 58 button Press Resuming a speed stored beforehand button Press Decreasing speed button and hold Press button the using Accelerating button Press Increasing speed the driving speed is maintained and and stored. drivingis speed maintained the isreleased, thebutton After pedal. accelerator pressure on without accelerates the The vehicle 3 1 4 3 . . repeatedly until the desired repeatedly until the desired 3 . Malfunction fulfilled. be not may operation for briefly. displayed is speed Selected Display intachometer* the tachometer, the conditions necessary necessary conditions the tachometer, the km/h isdisplayed briefly in or--- mph If --- appears on the Control Display. ontheControl appears lights ifup thesystemfails. A message lamp in tachometer the warning The < dent risk. acci- thereis anincreased otherwise, shade; the in road of sections and bridges on e.g. carefully, risk ofblack ice. increased is an There up. lights lamp warning approx. +37 sinks to displayed temperature the When Outside temperature warning 3 2 1 Displays in tachometer engine. the protect to interrupted is supply fuel the range, this In gauge. of the zone overspeed red the in needle the with engine the operate Never Tachometer overview Controls Resetting the trip odometer thetrip Resetting ture display tempera- outside odometer, trip Odometer, speed vehicle Current above +37 above temperatures form at also can ice Black < 7 /+3 7 6 /+3 , a signal sounds and a and sounds asignal , 6 . Therefore, drive drive . Therefore, Check coolant level, refer to page play. theControl Dis- appear on message will tion, a hot. too In addi- becomes engine, the therefore and coolant, the if on willcome lamp warning A Coolant temperature aswell as fortheodometer km or miles measure, of units respective the Select Units of measure tachometer. the pressknob on, switched theignition With Resetting thetrip odometer and tripOdometer odometer with the fuel filler flap. filler thefuel with vehicle ofthe side the toward points gauge fuel ofthe symbol pump arrownext to the gas The slightly. fluctuate may theindicator example, for areas, mountainous in driving are you when period, fora longer varies thevehicle thetilt of If page on onrefueling information find You can liters. gallons/50 US Approx. 13.2 tank capacity Fuel gauge Fuel outside temperature, page temperature, outside 177 . 64 . 7 189 or 6 . forthe 3 in in 59
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Controls overview ing, engine functions are not always assured. always not are functions engine ing, corner- rapid e.g. style, driving adynamic With damage could occur. and guaranteed not are functions engine wise, Display. Control the in remains km,themessage miles/50 approx. 30 than Whentherange cruisingis range. less remaining Control Display. The tachometer The Display. Control the briefly is on displayed amessage and arrow, red, to orange from change lamps indicator remaining the liters gallons/8 US 2.1 approx. of zone reserve to the fallen fuel levelhas the Once Reserve 60 onpage ofmeasure to Units refer measure, of units corresponding the set To > > > > > orderin listed: the displayed are ofinformation following items The edly to call up various items of information. repeat- lever signal intheturn thebutton Press Displays intachometer Computer* MINI Convertible: always Open Timer Open always Convertible: MINI speed Average consumption fuel Current consumption fuel Average range Cruising 30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other- refuel; to sure be km, miles/50 30 displayed is therange If less than < 64 .
displays the the displays With the trip computer, page computer, thetrip With ning. run- has been theengine time for the Calculated consumption Average fuel damage could occur. and arenotguaranteed functions wise, engine fuel currently in the tank. of the amount kmand miles/30 last the 18 over been driven thecar basis has theway the on of is calculated range The fuel. remaining the with available range cruising estimated the Displays range Cruising on the tachometer. the on down, the driving times are displayed digitally its soft top with MINI Convertible driving the If TimerAlways Open page computer, thetrip With of averagespeed. thecalculations in notincluded are off switched engine the and parked vehicle the with Periods Average speed emissions. exhaust minimum with tofueleconomy conducive style current is your driving toseewhether you toallow consumption fuel the current Displays Current fuelconsumption 2seconds. approx. for lever theturnsignal in button press the consumption: fuel resetaverage To displayed. trip foranother fuelconsumption average the unsga ee o prx seconds. 2 forapprox. lever signal turn in the press button the speed: resetaverage To displayed. trip another for speed average the 30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other- refuel; to sure be km, miles/50 30 displayed is therange If less than < 61 61 , you can have have can , you , you can have have can , you 2 1 tachometer. the in digitally displayed is time driving total The can displayed. minutes be hours 59 and 6 of maximum A top down. theconvertible with drove you that minutes and hours of number the indicates Timer Open analog Always The Analog to Always Open Timer dealer. MINI your contact time, driving total resetthe To seconds. 2 approx. for page button, odometer" trip "Reset or the Press hold inand thebutton the turn signal lever thedisplay To reset 2 1 displayed: are times driving following The Minute display Minute display hour LED time driving Current time driving Total 2 : 12 , Displays in the "Trip computer": "Trip the in Displays > > 2. 1. Display onthe Control Displays > > > info": "Onboard the in Displays Average speed Average Average fuel consumption "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" Info" "Vehicle > > if: ofarrival time Estimated destination from Distance range Cruising tem, page tem, sys- navigation the in a destination Enter below further puter, to information refer com- inthe enteradistance Manually 111 61
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Controls overview speed Resetting the fuel consumption and > > displays Both show: > > > 62 3. 2. 1. values: all reset To Resetting the trip computer 2. 1. fuelconsumption: average and speed average the for resetthevalues To Average speed displayed. are speed Average and consumption fuel Average Trip distance Trip duration Departure time "Reset" "Trip computer" "Vehicle Info" sage. mes- the toconfirm joystick MINI Press the entry. menu respective the Select 1 areclosed. thedoors and isat a cle standstill vehi- the on, isswitched ignition whenthe able Certainsettings and information are onlyavail- Operating principle Settings and information > > > > for: Button Calling up computer information computer up Calling values set or display selected Confirming values Setting display Selecting 60 4 3 2 Exiting the menu the Exiting check vehicle Displaying Calling up Check Control 67 68 63
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Controls overview Exiting displays Exiting 64 information. of item or nextsetting the to directly changes display The 2. 1. information of item or setting Next 8 seconds. approx. for made are entries no if exited also are Displays displayed. again is speed once vehicle Current 2. 1. Press the button for a longer period. foralonger button Press the repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed. in lever button theturnsignal press the While in a setting or information item, briefly period. foralonger button Press the lever repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed. theturnsignal in button pressthe Briefly 4. 3. 2. 1. page on Profile Personal to also refer control in currently use, for the remote stored are Thesettings settheunits of measure. To Units of measure MINI dealer. on theignition. switch or engine the start you after immediately the next scheduled service are briefly displayed of date the and distance driving remaining The requirements Service Select desiredSelect unit. the desiredSelect menu item. the "Language/Units" "Settings" read out from the remote by your theremote control out from read be can required work service of extent The < 26 . 2. 1. play, refertopage play, Dis- Control the on displayed maintenance of scope the on information further have can You requirements Detailed information onservice information More 5 4 3 2 1 Possible displays "Vehicle status" "Vehicle Info" "Vehicle Vehicle check Vehicle Rear brakes Front brakes Engine oil information selecting for Button 16 . Symbols inspections, ifinspections, necessary, is displayed. required legally and work maintenance selected the Move MINI joystick theleft. toward A list of To exit from the menu: joystick. the MINI press entry and an Select entry: every on information moredetailed request You can aredisplayed. inspections mandated and legally procedures maintenance Required 3. onpage found be tem can Sys- Maintenance ontheMINI information More 9 8 7 6 "Service required" Next setting or item of oritem of setting information Next Exit display fluidBrake test Roadworthiness No service is service required. currently No 64 191 . 64 65
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Controls overview schedule a service appointment. service a schedule 3. 2. 1. ensured. not CBS Service is Condition Based effectiveness of 4. 10. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. always set correctly, page correctly, set always is Display ontheControl surethedate Make inspections* required forlegally deadlines Entering 66 "Service required" "Service "Vehicle status" "Vehicle Info" "§ Vehicle inspection" "§ The date entry entry date is stored. The thesetting. toapply joystick MINI Press the ment. adjust- the make to joystick MINI the Turn highlighted. is year The thesetting. toapply joystick MINI Press the settings. the Create "Date:" menu. entry the deadline Open The service deadline passed. deadline service has already The Please approaching. is inspection dated man- legally a or service for deadline The 67 ; the otherwise, 4. 3. 2. 1. Setting time zone Clock 2. 1. time the Setting Move the MINI joystick toward theleft. toward joystick MINI the Move exitmenu: the from To The time zone timeis zone stored. The joystick.zone is set and press the MINI joystick until the desiredTurn time MINI "Time zone:" "Time/Date" "Settings" "Time/Date" "Settings" The time format is stored. time format The 4. 3. 2. 1. The date is stored. date The 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Setting date Date page on Profile Personal alsoto in use,refer currently remotecontrol stored settings for the are The format time the Setting time. new the accepts system The 5. 4. 3. joystick. Select the desired formatand press the MINI "Format:" "Time/Date" "Settings" and year. and month the for settings necessary the Create joystick. displayed and press the MINI is day desired the until joystick MINI Turn "Date:" "Time/Date" "Settings" joystick. MINI the press and settheminutes to joystick theMINI Turn joystick. MINI the press and hours tosetthe joystick the Turn "Time:" 26 . 3. 2. 1. format date the Setting page on Profile alsotoPersonal in use,refer currently remotecontrol stored settings for the are The 4. areas indicator the in colors and combinations ious var- in up light can lamps warning and Indicator Indicator and warninglamps Display. Control the of bottom the at messages text as well as signal in play an acoustic and, somecircumstances, dis- the in lamps warning and indicator involve messages Control Check monitored. tems alertsyoutoanymalfunctions sys-and in the functions vehicle Check monitors The Control The concept Check Control "Format:" "Time/Date" "Settings" Select the desired format. desired the Select 26 1 and . 2 . 67
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Controls overview OK Exit display on. lamp comes asthecorresponding as soon will this urgent shown cases, information In be page to refer respond, to how and malfunction a of thecause later,e.g.regarding information more view can you messages, Control most Check For Supplemental text messages lamps. warning and indicator Display explain the meaning of the displayed theControl of edge theupper at messages Text messages Text 68 > lever. signal intheturn thebutton Press Hiding Check Control messages > played inplayed succession. dis- they are time, atthesame occur tions malfunc- several If hidden. be cannot They rectified. been have untilmalfunctions the displayed are Check Control messages Some remain stored. remain seconds,ically but hidden after approx. 20 automat- are messages Control Check Other 69 . > shown here. shown They are marked with the symbol 3. 2. 1. is if closed. door played driver's the messages only Check Control can Stored dis- be storedViewing CheckControl messages sages can be viewed whenever is convenient. it whenever viewed can be sages Control stored. have Check mes- been messages This symbol indicates that Check Control Control Check that indicates symbol This are displayed. "CHECK INFO" and symbol corresponding repeatedly until pressthe thebutton Briefly changes. until thedisplay button Press hold the and played. until islever repeatedly "SET/INFO" dis- theturnsignal in button pressthe Briefly shown here. shown > They are marked with the symbol 2. 1. Displaying, settingchanging or limit the km/h. againleast byat 3 mphor5 second iftime your vehicle speed falls below it this onlya speed of You warned reaching are limit speed inarea. a urban an exceed if warnings you to receive forexample, you, This enables this speed. reach you when indicate will message Control a Check and a speed, Enter Speed limit 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Using the on-board computer 5. 4. "Speed" "Settings" message. text a Select message. text the Select Control" "Check status" "Vehicle Info" "Vehicle messages. forother check to pressthebutton Briefly Control Display. onthe appears message text the addition, In displayed. is message corresponding the stored, If Check hasbeen a message Control displayed. is OK" "CHECK If there areno Check Control messages, then down. button the Hold 3. 2. 1. Applying your current speed as limit limit. the as current speed your system adopts The 4. 3. 2. 1. limit Activating/deactivating the 3. The limit is stored. The 5. 4. "Select current current speed" "Select "Speed" "Settings" rs h IIjoystick. MINI the Press "Warning" "Speed" "Settings" "Warning at:" "Warning Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. the apply to joystick MINI the Press tosetthelimit. MINI joystick the Turn 69
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Controls overview 1. Control Display. onthe thelanguage can set You Control Display onthe Language settings Altering 4. 70 3. 2. 1. dialog. short and a dialog astandard between Switch thevoicedialog Setting 3. 2. rently inrently use. control cur- remote is stored setting for the The 4. The limit warning is switched on. switched is warning limit The "Settings" joystick. MINI the Press "Speech mode:" "Speech "Language/Units" "Settings" "Language:" "Language/Units". Select desiredSelect language. the the brightness control may not be clearly visible. clearly be not may control brightness the inrently use.In bright conditions, forexample, control cur- remote is stored for the setting The 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. currently remotecontrol use. for in the stored is setting The on. switched are beams low the while setting thebasic change can you that Note, conditions. lighting however, ambient tothe adapted is automatically brightness The Control ofthe Display Brightness rently inrently use. control cur- remote is stored for the setting The 4. rs h IIjoystick. MINI the Press is reached. ting Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set- "Brightness" display" "Control "Settings" Select the desired dialog. desired the Select warning being issued too late. too issued being warning physical tothesystem circumstances may lead at speed; an object otherwise, high approaching Avoid parking. when case the usually is as mfrom sensors. the rear center 1.50 ft/ therearcorner orapprox. sensors, 5 from cm in/60 24 approx. is object an until sound not does warning acoustic an However, m. 2 ft/ arange of approx. 6.5 sensorshave These bumper. either in sensors therearefour ultrasonic thedistance, measure To vehicle. the behind object an of presence after approx. 3seconds. approx. after parallel signal toawall, stops ing theacoustic driv- when e.g. constant, remains distance the If tone sounds. continuous a then cm, ft/30 1 roughly below to falls object nearest tothe If shorter. thedistance become thetones between intervals the decreases, object and vehicle between As thedistance Acoustic signals driving. before short period this Wait R. to position lever selector transmission theautomatic or move gear reverse engage you when second 1 approx. after automatically isactivated thesystem on, running With engine or theignitionthe switched Automatic mode indicator visual a and signals in with reverse. you Acousticparking assists PDC The concept PDC* Park Distance Control safety Technology for driving comfort and objects when they are approached slowly, slowly, areapproached whenthey objects indicate can that aid aparking is PDC
warn you you the warn of < nysryfo itneo tlat4i/0cm. in/10 4 least of at a distance from spray only periods thesensorsforand lengthy toward jet the direct not do cleaner, high-pressure a using When effectively. tooperate will they continue toensurethat free of orsnowin ice order and clean sensors the keep problem, this avoid To or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal. outthePDC thecarcan drown or inside outside sound sources Loud damage. property or injury personal of risk a is there otherwise, cautiously; drive always Therefore, detectable. be not may ledges, wall as such objects, truding is pro- given.signal audible Higher, continuous sensors' orafter before a the enter spots blind may suchascurbs, indicated, already objects Low etc. objects, wedge-shaped and thin objects such as trailer tow bars and couplings, reach physical can its detection withsonic limits ultra- Moreover, detected. be cannot objects driver. in Sensors,too,have blind which spots the with remains always obstructions any and tor lever is moved into the R theR position. into ismoved lever tor is or selec- into transmission reverse the shifted assoonthe Display ontheControl appears sounds. The display signal the acoustic before Control areshown on even the Display objects distant of contours The Display. Control the on toobjects distances thesystemshow have To warning visual with PDC Malfunction System limitations mating the distance between the vehicle thevehicle between distance the mating esti-PDC, responsibility final for with Even trol Display. Have the the system checked. trol Display. Have ontheCon- appears failed. A message Indicator lampcomes on: PDChas 71 <
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Technology for driving comfort and safety an accident. of the risk running thereby driving hazardous in engaging by margin safety additional the reduce responsibility of the driver. Therefore do not the remains style always driving An appropriate driving conditions. adverse in even stability vehicle's the maintain to help that systems of number a has MINI Your systems control stability Driving 72 application. braking full the of duration forthe brake onthe thepressure reduce not Do benefits provided by ABS are exploited. all the time, same the At minimum. a to tance helpsdis- Thus,thesystem keep braking force. braking maximum develop automatically to Rapidly depressingthe brakecauses this system Brake Assist behavior. braking stable ensure to wheels rear pressure in the thebrake controls system The Electronic brake-force distribution EBV change. alane ing in while braking turnsordur- enhanced further are characteristics steering and stability Driving BrakeCornering Control CBC page to refer safely, Braking increased. isthus safety Active braking. full during even is maintained response steering ing. Safe ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak- Antilock Brake System ABS engine. time start every you the ABS is operational even with driving stability control systems. systems. control stability driving with even berepealed, cannot ofphysics laws The < 101 . Deactivating DSC wheels. vidual output and through braking actions at the indi- engine reducing by limits physical within course asafe maintain helps DSC thevehicle cases, wheels. front In onits sliding these is vehicle the fishtails rearend vehicle's the aswhen or such conditions driving unstable detects also DSC erate. rest oraccel- from away pull whenyou traction losing from wheels driving the prevents DSC The concept StabilityControl DSC Dynamic For better control better For go out. lamps indicator the DSC again: button the Press Activating DSC as soon as possible. again DSC activate stability, vehicle increase To brief period. a for offDSC toswitch helpful be it can in snow, driving snowchains with When orto'rock free' executed. longer areno actions promoting propulsion and ing tor lampscome on. DSC is deactivated. Stabiliz- indica- DSC until the repeatedly thebutton Press DSC is deactivated. is DSC up: lights ments lamp ele- in indicator display the The forces. ing break- and thedriving controls DSC The flashes: lamp theindicator If For better control better For in thetachometer. is displayed inlights the display up TRACTION elements and Press the button, the indicator lamp for DTC Activating DTC > > > DTC: activate briefly to useful be can it situations, exceptional thefollowing In caution. with todrive suitable need Youtherefore ity. stabil- restricted driving though with propulsion Thesystemensuresmaximum snowy roads. uncleared as such conditions road special for optimized propulsion is that DSC of type a is DTC DTC* Control Traction Dynamic when driving with snow chains snow with driving when deep snowor on loose surfaces when rocking the vehicle free,driving out of roads snowy uncleared on slush, or inclines, in onsnow-covered when driving DTC is activated. tachometer: the in displayed is TION and TRAC- up lights lamp indicator The forces. DTC controls the driving and breaking flashes: If the indicator lamp deactivated. is DSC the evenwhen unevenly, are rotating wheels drive when propulsion toimprove occur Interventions (differential lock (differential Interventions ventions. inter- stabilizing more no be will There vated. deacti- both are DSC Control Stability Dynamic and DTC Control Traction Dynamic The on. in elementscome thedisplay lamps indicator for theDSC button atleast3seconds: Press the Deactivating both DTC and DSC go out. lamps indicator DSC the again: button the Press Deactivating DTC to rollbackward. to start itwill and seconds, 2 about for vehicle the ately theHill start since driving Assist holdsonly immedi- brake, the release you After period. this thebrake is released. after seconds 2 AssistHill holds thecar place in for approx. 2. 1. brake for this. parking the use to necessary not Itis inclines. HillAssist aids you in comfortablydriving offon Assist Hill out. lamps theindicator again: go button Press the Activating DSC off. drive and immediately thebrake Release thebrake. MINI with the Hold vehicle can roll backward slightly roll can vehicle backward during the gradient, and load onthe Depending < * ) in braking braking in ) 73
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Technology for driving comfort and safety > transmission: automatic With > > > even more sportily. respond to MINI your causes button the Pressing Sport button* 74 tire. asaflat reported and detected is This change. wheel sponding ofthecorre- speed rotational the therefore and diameter loss, the a pressure of event the In while ual wheels moving. individ- ofthe speeds therotational comparing loss apressure in detects atire by system The thetires. in pressure tion infla- the actual does not measure system The The concept Flat Tire Monitor FTM* > > Deactivatingsystem the is in briefly thetachometer. displayed SPORT The LED lights up. theSPORT button. Press Activating the system More rapid gear shifting in Sport program. shifting in Sport rapid gear More coasting moresporty mode. in sounds engine the Works: Cooper John S, Cooper is more direct. response Steering the accelerator.of movements to morespontaneously responds Engine Switch off theengine. off Switch again. button SPORT the Press not function. not spare tire spare is with driven a thevehicle space-saver When > > > > delayed or malfunction: thefollowing system In be could the situations, pressure regularly. tion infla- the tire check Therefore, be detected. not tires lossin can- all four pressure even A natural, advance. System limitations change. wheel tire or every after pressure and inflation tire the of correction every after system the Initialize reliable signaling of a flat tire is ensured. not correct; pressure inflation was otherwise, tire the initialized while been have must system The requirement Functional The statusis displayed. The 3. 2. 1. isactive. theFTM not or e.g. whether Display, Control on the displayed be can Monitor Tire Flat of the status current The Status display Snow chains areattached chains Snow acceleration lateral high wheels, drive the in slip driving: of style Performance-oriented orslippery surface onsnowy road Driving initialized been not has System "Flat Tire Monitor" "Vehicle status" "Vehicle Info" external influences cannot be indicated in Sudden serious tire damage caused by < * , page 205 , the Flat Tire Monitor can- Monitor Tire Flat the , Control DSC isactivated. DSC Control Stability the Dynamic reported, is flat tire a When 2. 1. in tire inflation pressure. tinued automatically. tinued con- is initialization the resumes, driving When Indication of a tire ofa flat Indication 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. chains. snow with driving when system the initialize not Do pressures. inflation the firming con- by isstarted Initialization tire. ofaflat tion thedetec- for values asreference tire pressures inflation set the adopts process initialization The system the Initializing ters RSC on the tire onthe sidewall. ters RSC let- the containing symbol acircular by fied tires, refertopage Run-flat normal tires or with run-flat tires run-flat with or tires normal with is equipped thevehicle whether Check maneuvers. steering and braking tion. Avoid sudden with cau- vehicle the stop and speed Reduce Start to drive. to Start initialization. tostartthe "Reset" Select driving. start not do but engine, the Start "Reset" status" "Vehicle Info" "Vehicle ing, which can be interrupted at any time. time. any at interrupted be can which ing, driv- during completed is initialization The sounds. There is a loss Thereis oramajor a flat tire sounds. Display. signal Control Anacoustic also the on appears red. Amessage and lamps oninThe come warning yellow < 185 , areidenti- * . 2. 1. Normal tires Actions in the event ofa tireflat cle while driving. thestressonvehi- and onthe load depends The distance it is possibleto drive with aflat tire tire inflationpressure: withloss of complete distance Possible driving 3. 2. 1. tire: adamaged with driving When a with flat tire driving Continued resultinto drive can serious accidents. km/h. 80 or mph 50 to up speeds tire at adamaged with driving continue can You tires*Run-flat refer to page to refer page to refer wheel, damaged the on tire flat the remedy to System Mobility the Use center. your MINI tire, contact damaged the toidentify isnotpossible If it initialized. be then must system The initialized. been have not may Monitor Tire Flat the then tires, If theinflation pressure is correct in allfour pose. System, page The inflation pressure displayof the Mobility tires. four all in pressure inflation the so, check do To Identify the damaged tire. initialized. initialized. been mustthen be Thesystem not have might Tirerect, Monitor the Flat cor- is tires four all in pressure inflation the If sure in all tires. four air check pres- the At thenext opportunity, km/h. 80 mph or 50 a of notexceed speed Do vers. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- tires, do not continue driving; continuing continuing driving; notcontinue tires, do run-flat with equipped not is vehicle the If 201 , or to replace the damaged wheel, wheel, damaged the replace or to , 204 202 . , can be used for this , used for this be pur- can < 75
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Technology for driving comfort and safety and contact your MINI MINI center. your contact and driving inresult an not continue accident. Do erwise, pieces of tire may come off,which could toastop; thevehicle oth- bring and speed your erties. braking distance andaltered self-steering prop- alonger braking, during stability lane reduced in e.g. thehandling characteristics, change A loss tire inflationof results pressure in a etc. load, vehicle temperature, side out- condition, road onthe speed, depending longer, style, can be also driving agentle with or, shorter be itcan driving, while vehicle the on onthestrain exerted degree considerable depends to a driving thepossible Since distance potholes, curbs, etc. as over such obstacles and driving abruptly ing turn- Avoid accordingly. style driving your Adapt change. orself-steering longer, will response will distances braking whenbraking, be sooner will e.g.thevehicle skid change, characteristics handling the tires, damaged with driving When km. miles/80 50 approx. for todrive bepossible itmay load, anaverage With 76 properly. operate will thatthe system ensure to with usewheels Always electronics TPM able signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. reli- was otherwise, correct; pressure inflation the while reset been have must system The requirement Functional tires. more or in one pressure lossof significant a is there if you notifies system tires. The mounted four the in pressure inflation the Measuring The concept TPM* Tire Pressure Monitor indicate finalfailure of thetire. Reduce can while driving noises orloud Vibrations pe f5 p/0km/h. mph/80 50 of speed a notexceed do and Drive cautiously < < > > tire: flat a indicate cannot and is inactive system The indicated despite correct tire inflation pressures. be tire may aflat example, For reset. been not correctly if does not system it operate has The advance. Status display System limitations driving is taken into account. into taken is driving tire during inflationin pressure the A change thetires.color of the by indicated is condition system and tire The computer on-board onthe indicator Status statusis displayed. The 3. 2. 1. is activated. theTPM or e.g. whether not can be displayed by the on-board computer, Pressure Monitor oftheTire current status The wheel change. wheel or tire every after and pressure inflation tire the correction of each after the system again Reset quency. fre- same transmission with the devices by othersystemsor TPM with Interference compact spare wheel spare compact e.g. electronics, a TPM without if a wheel "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM" Monitor Pressure "Tire "Vehicle status" "Vehicle Info" external influences cannot be indicated in Sudden, serious tire damage caused by < * , is mounted. 2. 1. menu. main the button. opens This Press the refer to page to refer principles for operating computer, On-board Using the on-board computer change. wheel or tire every after and pressure inflation tire the correction of each after thesystemagain Reset system the Resetting > > > Reasons for this may be: detect apuncture. system cannot The Gray > > yellow wheels All tire. indicated the in sure oftirepres- loss tireorsubstantial isaflat There wheelyellow One puter. com- on-board the on displayed is active" "TPM desired state. to the pressure inflation corresponds The Green theTPM. by cated indi- is this when required only is correction A "Vehicle status" "Vehicle Info" "Vehicle Malfunction. frequency. transmission the same from systemsordevices Interference with reset. being is TPM last. initialized pressures inflation the on based thusissues awarning and change wheel notresetafter a was system The in tires. several pressure is flat tireThere a orsubstantial lossof tire 16 . > > displayed. Message for low tire inflation pressure inflation tire low for Message 3. is displayed. tire!" "Low in Themessage displayed yellow. are matically. auto- is continued resumes,resetting driving When time. any at interrupted be trip can The again. isdisplayed active" TPM "Status: ontheControl and Display in green are depicted drive.automaticallycompleted tires you The as is process Theresetting monitored. tobe values target the as accepted tires are the in pressures inflation set the minutes, afew driving After displayed. is TPM..." and "Resetting gray in tiresareshown The 6. 5. 4. the inflation pressures initialized last. initialized pressures inflation the on based thusissues awarning and change wheel notresetafter a was system The pressure. is flat tireThere a orsubstantial lossof tire "Reset TPM" "Reset Start to drive. to Start TPM". "Reset initialization selecting by Start the away. drive not do – engine the Start resetting, allresetting, Control tires on the Display is the system while is detected flat tire a If sounds. The position of the faulty tire is tire is faulty the of position The sounds. signal also Anacoustic computer. board and red. A message appears on the on- lamps oninThe come warning yellow < 77
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Technology for driving comfort and safety Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated. is DSC Control Stability Dynamic pressure isthe alow reported, inflation When 2. 1. 78 resultinto drive can serious accidents. km/h. mph/80 to50 up speeds tire at with adamaged driving continue You can tires*Run-flat 2. 1. Normal tires Actions in the event ofa tireflat ters RSC on the sidewall. tire onthe RSC ters let- the a by containing fied circular symbol tires, refertopage Run-flat tunity. atyour if oppor- earliest necessary replaced and checked theelectronics have this case, In electronics. wheel theTPM damage can System, e.g.Mobility tire sealant, of use The normal tires or with run-flat tires or run-flat tires with normal with equipped is the vehicle whether Check maneuvers. steering and braking sudden tion. Avoid with cau- vehicle stop the and speed Reduce refer to page. to refer page referto wheel, thedamaged tire on flat the remedy to System Mobility the Use center. your MINI tire, contact damaged the toidentify itisnotpossible If reset. mustthenbe reset. Thesystem been have not may Pressure Monitor theTire tires, then all pressure theinflation If is in four correct be used for this. refertopage System, Mobility the of display pressure inflation The tires. four pressure so,checkTo in do the inflation all tire. thedamaged Identify tires, do not continue driving; continuing continuing driving; notcontinue tires, do run-flat with equipped is not vehicle the If 201 , or to replace the damaged wheel, , ortoreplace the damaged 204 . 185 , areidenti- * . 202 < , can , can tinue driving and contact your MINI center. MINI your and contact driving tinue notcon- resultin Do could anaccident. which off, of tire come may otherwise, pieces stop; toa vehicle the bring and speed your Reduce erties. braking distance andaltered self-steering prop- alonger braking, during stability lane reduced in e.g. thehandling characteristics, change A loss tire results inflationof pressure in a etc. load, vehicle temperature, side out- condition, road onthe speed, depending longer, style, can be also driving agentle with or, shorter be itcan driving, while vehicle the on exerted strain the on degree considerable depends to a driving thepossible Since distance potholes, curbs, etc. as such obstacles over and driving abruptly ing turn- Avoid accordingly. style driving your Adapt longer, orself-steering change. will response will distances braking whenbraking, be sooner will e.g.thevehicle skid change, characteristics handling the tires, damaged with driving When km. miles/80 50 approx. for todrive bepossible itmay load, anaverage With driving. while cle thestressonvehi- and load the on depends The distance it is possible to drivewith a flat tire pressure: inflation tire of loss complete with distance driving Possible 3. 2. 1. tire: adamaged with driving When a with flat tire driving Continued reset. reset. mustthenbe system been The have not may Pressure Monitor theTire tires, then all pressure theinflation If is in four correct tires. all four in sure theair pres- check opportunity, At thenext km/h. mph/80 of 50 a notexceed speed Do vers. Avoid suddenbraking and steering maneu- indicate completefailure of the tire. can while driving noises orloud Vibrations pe f5 p/0km/h. mph/80 50 of speed a notexceed do Drive and cautiously < < system, page resetthe and pressure inflation tire the Check > > > situations: type theThis is following of in shown message be can detected. punctures No appears. message a and in gray shown are tires and can lead to also lead to can tire Underinflation and failure. tire causes tooverheat tire the underinflated significantly a on Driving pressure. proper themto the aspossible, inflate and as soon yourtires check and stop youshould illuminates, telltale tirepressure thelow when Accordingly, underinflated. significantly are tires your of oneormore telltale when tire pressure low a illuminates that TPMS system monitoring sure pres- atire with equipped been has vehicle your feature, tires. Assafety sure for an those added pres- inflation tire the proper determine should cle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you on vehi- the indicated the size sizethan different pressure label. tion If a hastires of your vehicle or tireinfla- placard onthe vehicle manufacturer vehicle the by recommended pressure inflation the to inflated and cold when monthly checked should Each be tire, thespare, including Systems FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring NHTSA/ to according Declaration reset system unsuccessful for Message Malfunction radio frequency. radio using same the ordevices other systems to due malfunctioning temporarily is TPM If mounted. hasbeen electronics If TPM without a wheel thesystemchecked. Have isIf amalfunction. there a tire has been changed, forexample. changed, been a tire has resetafter system is not The computer. on-board appears on the A message yellow. in on come lamps warning Both the computer, low. Ontheon-board yel- in on comes lamp warning larger the continuously; lights up then low and in lamp yel- flashes warning small The 77 . continue to function properly. tofunction continue to the TPMS allow wheels and tires alternate or thereplacement toensurethat vehicle your tires or orwheelson one replacing more after telltale malfunction theTPMS erly. Always check prop- functioning from theTPMS prevent that vehicle the on wheels or tires or alternate ment of replace- theinstallation reasons, including of foravariety occur may malfunctions TPMS pressure as intended. lowtire orsignal to detect able be not may system the illuminated, is cator indi- malfunction the When exists. malfunction asthe long as startups vehicle subsequent upon lit.continuously sequence This will continue remain then and minute one approximately for will flash telltale the amalfunction, detects tem sys- the When telltale. pressure tire low the with TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined illuminates. tale tirepressuretell- low theTPMS level the at which reached has not underinflation if even pressure, tire correct maintain to responsibility driver's the itis and maintenance, tire proper for tute asubsti- isnot theTPMS that note Please ability. thevehicle'sstopping handling and affect may life, tire and tread and efficiency fuel reduces 79
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Technology for driving comfort and safety integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not Do seats. front the to airbags side integral notspecifically for objects seats with approved other or cushions covers, seat attach not Do mobile phone. device a or asfor anavigation any holders such film do or notaffix adhesive and with coverings, freefromobstruction, ger side i.e. notcover do it passen- the on window and dashboard the Keep modify them in any other way. or impacts. certain rollover dents, rear situations ofcollision, e.g.notin minor type every acci- in triggered be not to designed are airbags The impact. during thehead protects Convertible in theMINI airbag side/head The bag supports the head. supports the sideupper body area. The head air event of side impact. The relevant side airbag the in provide protection help airbags side and head the needed, When restraint. adequate vide pro- in alonecannot safety which impacts belts tofrontal responding by passenger front and driver the protect help frontairbags The tion. Airbags 80 effect Protective 3 2 1 MINI: covers: marked the under arelocated following airbags The Head airbags at the front and and rear atthefront airbags Head backrests in airbags Side airbags Front < cover panels of the airbags, cover them or or them cover airbags, the of panels cover the to materials adhesive apply not Do ensure the best possible personal protec- Observe the instructions theinstructions on page Observe 41 to bags can also be found on the sun visors. sun the on found be also can bags air- the about information and notices Warning result in injury. personal which either of could activation, airbag ired undes- or emergency an in failure to lead could thesystem service to attempts unprofessional required licenses. Otherwise, explosives the has and personnel trained correspondingly with your MINI of manufacturer of the procedures works torepair that oraccording a workshop aMINI dealer bag generators executedonly by testing, disposal repair, removal, of air- and the system, have restraint oftheairbag triggering or deactivation, ofmalfunctions, theevent In burns. thereisof adanger because been triggered, system has after diately the imme- components individual the touch not Do wheel. steering the or dismantle toremove not attempt Do headliner. ofthe sides asthe aswell pillars roof cluster, the doors, instrument and the on the wheel, ofthesteering in thecenter upholstery the includes way. This any in its wiring or system not modify the individual components of the Do vehicle. fromthe system retention airbag the toremove attempt not Do thebackrests. over orjackets such clothing ascoats items of hang 2 1 Convertible: MINI Side/head airbags in the backrests airbags Front < ensured. wise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not Other- below. theseatfrom press against could which seat the under items any notplace Do MINI. your of manufacturer the by ommended seatunlessthey specificallyare passenger rec- tothefront items orother mats ball cushions, covers, notattach Do onarearseat. senger pas- therelevant transport position, sitting the changing by achieved be cannot status airbag desired If the out. goes lamp indicator the and are activated airbags passenger front that the so his shouldor her sitting change position senger cases, such comes thepas- In on. airbags senger pas- front the for lamp indicator the positions; in certain sitting adults and adolescents by vated bedeacti- also can airbags side frontand The ing children safely, page Transport- under instructions handling and tions MINI: airbags passenger offront Status below. airbags front passenger of toStatus refer vated, acti- or deactivated airbags, passenger front the accordingly. thesystem by deactivated or activated are passenger front the for bags air- side and front The occupied. is seat the how whether and determines seatcushion senger pas- in impression the front of An analysis the passenger airbags Automatic deactivation of the front passenger seat, read the safety precau- safety read the seat, passenger front achild the on transporting Before view mirror shows of current mirror status view the shows rear- interior the above lamp indicator The < < 47 . > > > deactivated. or areactivated airbags passenger front the whether lamp shows indicator The is occupied. seat passenger thefront how and whether with accordance in airbags side and front passenger's ofthefront status functional the shows bags air- passenger lampfront for the indicator The MINI Convertible: senger notactivated. senger are pas- forthefront airbags side and front The empty. is seat onif the notcome lamp does indicator The activated. are senger pas- forthefront airbags side and front The ontheseat. isdetected position long sitting as on come not correct a in and size does of sufficient a person as lamp indicator The aredeactivated. airbags passenger the front that and detected been has seat child the that indicates on. It comes airbags thefrontpassenger tor lamp for theindica- that check achild seat, installing After vehicle. the of manufacture of time the child seats that were required by NHTSA at notactivated. senger are pas- forthefront airbags side and front The ontheseat. is detected system restraint whenchild a specially in a designated child The indicator lamp onas comes intended system. This particularly applies to to applies particularly This system. the by child aredetected seats Most < 81
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Technology for driving comfort and safety as intended even if a severe accident occurs. accident if asevere even as intended function not will system the that risk the is there ational. areoper- thebelt tensioners and system airbag entire the that indicate to briefly on comes lamp Operational readiness airbagof system 82 you. the willmultilevel system and airbag protect tensioner belt seat the oftheaccident, severity on the and, depending car accident minor wear Always your safety belt, it you in protects a vehicle. all ofthe for occupants clearance head essary nec- the ensures system rollover protection the In addition to the frame, windshield reinforced asecond. of afraction within jected is headrest pro- behind the rear seat located roll bar The contact. loss ofground or during axis, longitudinal the of tilt extreme during tion, situa- driving ordangerous accident an during activated rollover is automatically system The protection system over Roll- Convertible: MINI > > Airbag system malfunction readiness, As ofradio page The warning lamp lit stays warning continuously. The on. or ignition isradio readiness switched the onwhen notcome lamp does warning The < have it checked without delay; otherwise, otherwise, delay; without checked it have system, airbag faultin the of a theevent In protection system with any objects. objects. any with system protection therollover of path travel the block Never 50 , the warning warning , the < refer to page to refer mandatory to maintain the service intervals, is it functions, all of life service long a ensure order to and in regularly system the Check or tem malfunctions. ofthe sys- lead tothefailure may repair Faulty dealer. MINI authorized an by out carried MINI only ofyour system tion protec- rollover on the work the necessary Have system. tective or therollover electrical pro- of wiring nents the compo- theindividual tomodify attempt Never top. it. check Service MINI your have dentally, system acci- releases protection therollover If Lowering extended, do not operate the convertible convertible dothe not operate extended, is system protective therollover If 64 . < engine. the to start power enough nothave might tery thebat- oftime; otherwise, periods long unduly The low beams come on when ignition is on. the onwhen come low beams The toposition switch thelight Turn Low beams parking, page for vehicle ofthe side one on lights of Activation on. switched is lighting vehicle side rearand front, The toposition switch thelight Turn Parking lamps position in is switch light ifthe off switched matically is auto- lighting theexterior off, switched tion When you open the driver's door with the igni- 3 2 1 0 beams lamps/low Parking Lamps position switch necessary, if lamps parking the on Switch Light Control Light Adaptive and lamps, welcome lights, ning Automatic headlamp control headlamp Automatic Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps lights running daytime and lamps Parking lights running daytime and off Lamps tery. Therefore, do not leave onfor notleave them Therefore, do tery. bat- the discharge will lamps parking The < 0 1 , . 2 or 85 3 * . . 2 1 * . . , daytime run- , daytime with the light switch in position inposition thelight switch with lamps onmanually. head- the switching by situations low-visibility of risks,safety kinds youshould to these respond Toavoid weather. fog or hazy detect cannot thesystem For conditions. lighting example, toambient onin be response switched should lamps the when determining in judgment isparked. thevehicle off after switched areautomatically on.Theexterior lamps tion page lights areactivated, running thedaytime If you switch on the fog lamps when conditions lighting ambient ofthe dent The low beams remain switched on indepen- lamps come on. thehead- before adelay be may there lights, tunnelswith into bright When overhead driving sky. ablue on low sitting is the sun when on come also may headlamps The When the switch is in position in is switch the When Automatic headlamp control* use, refer to Personal Profile, page use, refertoPersonal in control remote the for stored is setting The time. a onfor certain remain on and off, come switched thelowbeams switching off the ignition with the lamps Ifyou activate theheadlamp flasher after Pathway lighting unlocked. is vehicle the as assoon time a certain on for come lamps interior and lamps theparking theignition, off switch automatic headlampcontrol position when you or beam low inthe switch thelight you If leave lamps Welcome Light Control Adaptive precipitation. is there if or twilight, in e.g. atunnel, light in conditions, onambient ing are switched on and off automatically depend- 84 serve as a substitute for your personal personal your for asubstitute serve as cannot control headlamp automatic The , the low beams are always switched on on switched always are beams the low , * isactive. < * . 3 , the low beams beams low , the 3 and theigni- and 26 . 83
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Lamps needed. if lamps parking separately Switch on the off. switched is ignition afterthe stay on will lamps ing park- lamps parking position, In the parked. the is vehicle the after off switched automatically is lighting theexterior position, off thelamps In position. 2. 1. 4. 3. 2. 1. function the deactivating or duration the Setting 84 Profile, page to Personal refer use, control in remote is stored setting for the The lights running Activating/deactivating daytime control headlamp orautomatic lamps parking off, lamps the in remain can switch light The lights* running Daytime inrently use. control cur- remote is stored setting for the The "Lighting" "Settings" function. the deactivate to s or0 ofduration a time Set light.:" "Pathway "Lighting" "Settings" 26 . *
vated. acti- is not Control Light Adaptive the reverse, In cle is at a standstill. thevehi- when side thefront passenger toward light directs Control Light Adaptive the traffic, headlamp follows the course of the road. the of course the follows headlamp the the light parameters, from and other angle steering onthe Depending surface. road of the illumination better thatenables system control headlamp isavariable Control Light Adaptive The concept Light Control* Adaptive sible. pos- as soon as checked system the Have failed. or Control is Light malfunctioning Adaptive The is displayed. A message Malfunction function Standstill position to switch turnthelight on, switched theignition With Activating Adaptive Light Control stored for the remote control control in currently use. for the remote stored 3. Daytime running lights are switched on and and running areswitched lights on Daytime "Daytime running lamps" running "Daytime * 3 : to avoid blinding oncoming oncoming blinding avoid to : , refertopage 83 . Fog lamps*Fog point. thepressure to ordown theleverup Press Switching off engine. the to start power enough nothave might tery thebat- oftime; otherwise, periods long unduly arrow down, up the lever thevehicle, or press After parking Switching on doing so. when regulations local with Comply parking. for ononeside illuminated vehicle be can The Roadside parking lamps,left orright* 3 2 1 lamps parking roadside High beams/ Switching off high beams/headlamp flasher beams/headlamp offhigh Switching Switching on high beams parking lamps Turn signals/roadside tery. Therefore, do not leave onfor notleave them Therefore, do tery. thebat- drain lamps parking roadside The < 1 . * downward again. To switch themoff, press the switch upwardor > > MINI Convertible off. on/ lamps turn the to switch therespective Press 2 1 comes on when the rear fog lamp is switched on. switched is lamp fog rear the on when comes indicator lamp yellow on.The switched be must lamps fog with lamps parking or beams low The Rear fog lamp* km/h. mph/110 of 68 speed a to are switched on forwidera light distribution up position in is switch the When Guide fog lamps* matically when you switch on the fog lamps. beams. onthehigh flasherorswitch headlamp the activate you when areswitched off lamps the fog equipment, vehicle's your on Depending areswitched on. lamps indicatorgreen lamp fog onwhen the comes The lamps tooperate. onforthe fog switched parking lamps mustbe beams orlow The Fog lamps* Press the switch downward switch the Press lamps: fog rear on Turn upward switch the Press lamps: fog front on Turn Rear fog lamp Fog lamps vated, the low beams will come on auto- on come will beams low the vated, isacti- control headlamp theautomatic If * * 3 , guide fog lamps foglamps , guide 85 <
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Lamps switched off. switched are compartment passenger vehicle's the button onpage refer Start/Stop to automatically. controlled are lamp area cargo beams areon. orthelow lamps theparking when only lighting of the instrument brightness can the adjust You lighting Instrument 86 on/off. lamps interior the switch To on/offmanually lamps interior Switching lamps footwell interior the lamps, The lamps Interior is pressed briefly. button the time every decreases brightness The briefly. button the Press Reducing brightness reached. is brightness thedesired until thebutton and hold Press brightness Increasing while after the ignition is switched off, off, isswitched ignition the after while ashort onthebattery, thedrain reduce To < 50 , all lights in * and the Ambient lighting* therear: In press thebutton. front: In press the switch. off. and on lamps reading the switch To lamps*Reading 0seconds. 10 than longer frontfor the toward switch arepossible. and colors settings Intermediate > > can be changed. lighting ambient the of brightness and color The rs h utnfraot3seconds. 3 forabout thebutton press permanently, lamps offtheinterior switch To theswitch. Press The brightness changes in in stages. changes brightness The the rear. toward switch Press the stages. in changes color The switch forward.Press the ambient lighting, press and hold press the and lighting, ambient in the color acontinuous change For < climate control 2 1 MINI contains an air conditioner air an contains MINI your vehicle's onyour equipment, Depending versions Equipment Climate Automatic climate control climate Automatic Air conditioner * . *
or an automatic automatic an or 5 4 3 Air vents Air to the footwell Air tothe lation Air to the upper body area, draft-free venti- side windows and windshield the toward directed Airflow 87
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Climate can switch on the recirculated-air mode. is started. theengine briefly over when fog may thewindshield the weather, on Depending it or quickly. removes onthewindows tion condensa- helps function prevent cooling The is running. engine the while available only is function This setting. ature entirely to reduce the drain onthebattery. drain the reduce to entirely Air conditioner Air 88 function* Cooling conditioner. theair on switch to rate flow air desired any Set and the air supply is cut off. and air conditioner are completely switched off theairto Blower switch flowrate 0. rotary Turn the systemSwitching on/off Air flow rate 4 3 2 1 Temperature Recirculated-air mode function Cooling Air flowrate when the outside temperature is high, you is high, you temperature theoutside when intensely and more quickly air the cool To The air flow rate is lowered or switched off off orswitched lowered is flowrate air The be. will cooling or theheating effective rate, more the the Thehigher rate. flow air the Adjust reheated according tothetemper- according reheated the air then dried, is cooled, is on, function cooling the When < deteriorate continuously. deteriorate air quality in the passenger compartment will the otherwise, of time; period extended an over used should not recirculated-airbe mode The volumeif the air increase necessary. and mode theair thevehicle. within currently recirculates then Thesystem thecar temporarily. rior of the battery. the drain on off or switched entirely tothe reduce Recirculated-air mode Rear window defroster Rear window Temperature 7 6 5 Windshield heating Windshield Air distribution Rear window defroster mode, switch off the recirculated-air recirculated-air offthe switch mode, in recirculated-air fog thewindows If temperature. Turn downward, blue, to decrease the ature. the red,temper- toincrease Turn upward, ants, shut off the supply to the inte- tothe thesupply off shut ants, pollut- odor or contains unpleasant hasan aircar the If outside the The rear window heating is lowered lowered is heating window rear The time. acertain after matically The defroster is switchedoff auto- * < on the battery. the on thedrain to reduce offentirely orswitched ered 6 5 4 3 2 1 Automatic climate control* heating*Windshield distribution Air Temperature Air distribution, manual cooling Maximum Recirculated-air mode program AUTO Air manual flowrate, The front window heating is heating window low- The front time. ashort after off automatically switched is heating windshield The . ortothefootwell possible. are settings Intermediate body upper the to , area windows the to air of flow the Direct 6. 5. 4. 3. ing routine maintenance work. maintenance routine ing microfilter is changed by your MINI dealer dur- The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The Microfilter 2. 1. condensation removing and windows Defrosting 10 9 8 7 Turn on rear window defroster if if defroster necessary. window on rear Turn necessary. if heating windshield on Turn mode. recirculated-air Deactivate red. temperature, Set tothe highest activated. also more quickly when the cooling function thecooling when quickly more . fromthe windows is removed Condensation toposition Set air distribution Set air flow torate the level. maximum Windshield heating defroster window Rear function Cooling sation conden- removing and windows Defrosting * * 89 is is
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Climate on alongwith the AUTO program. switched isautomatically function cooling The sunlight. e.g. changes, sonal sea- with accordance in influences outside to adapted willbe specifications temperature your and Theair rate flow for you. thefootwell into and area body upper the toward windows, side display remains thesame. remains display The onthebattery. drain the reduce to entirely off orswitched lowered is rate airflow The tings onpage tings set- Profile Personal also to use, refer in currently for theremote control arestored settings Most thesettings. toadjust how about detail in you inform sections following The able for you. comfort- is which temperature interior an select to AUTO program below. All you need to do is air foralmostall and flow rate refer conditions, program AUTO climate interior Comfortable 90 increased. is also theairflow speed, vehicle increasing with Furthermore, top soft down. the with ing automatic climate control is optimized for driv- the Program, the Convertible During activated. is thesofttop Convertible Program If is open, Convertible Program AUTO program climate controlback on. theautomatic toswitch button theAUTO Press indicatorsout. go Alloff. switched is system the until repeatedly the–button pressing by flow air the Reduce the systemSwitching on/off Air flow rate,manual for the air flow rate with the AUTO button. AUTO the with rate flow air the for mode automatic the reactivate can You it. increase to button + the Press airflow. reduce to the–button Press distribution to thewindshield and air the adjusts program AUTO The 27 2 . offers the ideal air distribution distribution air ideal the offers deteriorate continuously. deteriorate air quality in the passenger compartment will the otherwise, of time; period extended an over used should not recirculated-airbe mode The theair if flowrate. and, increase necessary, mode recirculated-air the off switch or button thevehicle. within air currently the ton. but- AUTO the pressing by on back distribution them forthem maximum cooling. upper body area. You should therefore open rate maximum flows from at forthe vents the Air temperature. lowest the at mode lated-air recircu- into goes control climate automatic The possible. as soon as effect cooling maintains it. maintains then and necessary, if power or heating cooling Maximum cooling Recirculated-air mode Temperature Air distribution, manual significantly improved. significantly inside window surfaces, press the AUTO surfaces, press theAUTO inside window onthe toform starts condensation If mance of the Convertible Program can be be can Program Convertible ofthe mance reflector, perfor- the thewind attaching If regardless of the season, using maximum of using theseason, regardless maximum this temperatureas quickly as possible achieves control climate automatic The individually. temperature desired the Set 32 above temperatures At outside recirculates then system The off. shut is permanently air of outside supply mode: the Recirculated-air You can switch the automatic air air theautomatic switch You can to the footwell as selected. windows, to the upper body area or tothe is directed of air flow The running, you obtain a maximum maximum a obtain you running, 7 /0 6 < and when the engine is engine the when and < matically. The windshield windshield The heating function. cooling defroster. oftherearwindow notpart are and antenna time to achieve the settemperature. the toachieve time matic climate controldoes nothave enough function switches onautomatically. switches function When theAUTO buttonis pressed,the cooling matically. on auto- be may switched mode recirculated-air is started. The theengine overbriefly when fog may thewindshield theweather, on Depending it quickly. removes or onthewindows tion condensa- helps prevent cooling function The running. is engine the while cooled be only can compartment passenger The function Cooling heating*Windshield condensation removing and windows Defrosting defroster Rear window ture settings in quick succession, theauto- quick succession, in settings ture tempera- different between switch you If time. aftera certain off automatically switched is heating windshield The the on switch also purpose, this For side windows. front and windshield the from tion removes and ice Quickly condensa- asan wires ment, theupper serve Depending on your vehicle's equip- time. acertain after matically The defroster is switched off auto- ature setting. ature tothetemper- according reheated the air is then dried, cooled, is on, function cooling the When * is switched on auto- < Ventilation display, page requirements in the service information call up You can further maintenance. bined filter as a standard part of your scheduled outside air. Your MINI dealer replaces this com- the from pollutants gaseous filtering by tection pro- additional provides filter activated-charcoal The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter Swivel the entire theentire Swivel jet. Directionair of flow Turn theknob. Opening/closing 2 1 Jet for direction of flow of air direction Jet for closing and opening continuous for Knob 64 . 91
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Practical interior accessories MINI dealer orcall:MINI dealer 1-800-355-3515. your please contact information, additional For control. remote universal integrated the with compatible device remote is control radio that the assume memory button memory programmed of means by the operated be buttons ory mem- ononeofthe three be can programmed Thesignal of an original hand-heldtransmitter transmitters. held from hand- theoriginal signals stores ters and control regis- universal remote integrated The systems. lighting and openers and gate garage as such devices, remote-controlled various for transmitters hand-held asthree asmany replace control can universal remote integrated The The concept control* remote universal Integrated accessories interior Practical 92 compatibility Checking with the original hand-held transmitter. hand-held theoriginal with alsowith Comply the safety supplied instructions operated. being or range of device the ing travel pivot- the within are orobjects animals people, that no certain areato make immediate the inspect always control, remote universal grated page your possession, leaves vehicle the before programs stored the toclear remember security, of own your interest the in day, one vehicle your sell to decide you If of thesignal. transmission before programming or usingtheinte- or injury, damage possible prevent To original hand-held transmitter, you can can you transmitter, hand-held original the with supplied instructions or inthe thepackage thisIf symbol appears on 1 . The system in question can then then can in question . The system 1 . The LED . The 93 . 2 flashesconfirm to < Programming 4. 3. 2. 1. Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 2 1 Controls, Inc. of Johnson trademark registered is a HomeLink www.homelink.com or www.MINI.com at: the Internet on information also obtain can You desired memorybutton the and transmitter hand-held original the press key thetransmit on Simultaneously used. transmitter hand-held original respective memorybuttons from the cm to30 in/5 in to 12 of approx. distance 2 Hold the originalhand-held transmitter at a rapidly. All stored programs are cleared. LED the until seconds 20 approx. press both outermemorybuttons time: first the for operation starting When Switchon the ignition,page LED Memory buttons universal remote control. The LED LED The control. remote universal buttons ory slowly at first. As soon as the LED the as soon As first. at slowly onds, alter thedistance. does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec- rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED < hand-held transmitter and the mem- the and transmitter hand-held the between distance required The 1 depends on the system of the the of system the on depends 1 on the integrated integrated the on 1 . 50 . 2 2 1 2 flashes flashes flashes flashes for flashes 2
ing-code hand-held transmitters. hand-held ing-code buttons memory uses an alternating-code system, program the If system. it uses analternating-code transmitter hand-held the original two seconds, about lit for remains then and controlrapidly flashes remote 3. 2. 1. instructions: supplementary following the observe please code, alternating an employ that transmitters hand-held programming When ters. transmit- hand-held additional of programming or synchronization for possibilities the on there information will find set. You tobe device the instructions for theoperating control, consult remote universal theintegrated To program transmitters Alternating-code hand-held If theLED trol. button th down orhold ter transmit- hand-held original the for instructions the so, read To do system. either nating-code alter- an uses transmitter hand-held original the on. ignition orwith switched the running theengine system with the operate You can transmitter. hand-held theoriginal of thesignal with programmed button memory corresponding The 5. device to be tobe set, e.g.onthedrive unit. device Locate the button on the receiver of the Fixed-code hand-held transmitters. section the in above described as control remote universal integrated the Program device. remote-controlled ofthe therange within vehicle Park your 4. mitters, 3and repeat steps trans- hand-held otheroriginal To program a secondperson. of be theaid will easier with Programming whether check programming, repeated after even tofunction fails thesystem If 1 of the integrated universal remote con- remote universal integrated the of the radio remote controlled device. controlled remote radio the m from 50 of distance a exceed not Do 2 on the integrated universal universal ontheintegrated 1 as described under Alternat- under described as e programmed memory programmed e < < 1 is now now is 2. 1. programs individual Reassigning It is not possible to clear individual programs. cleared. are programs LED the until seconds 20 buttons memory outer both Press programs storedClearing 3. hand-held transmitter. hand-held programmed with the signal of the original button memory corresponding The 5. 4. Press the desired memory button memory desired the Press used. transmitter hand-held original respective buttons ory memorybuttons from the cm to30 in/5 in to 12 2 of approx. distance at a transmitter Hold hand-held original the repeat this this step. repeat and alterthedistance 15seconds, approx. IfLED the rapidly. LED the as assoon buttons both release and transmitter hand-held original seconds, press the transmit keyof the 20 IfLED the remote control. universal integrated three times. three control remote universal integrated the button memory theprogrammed Press nextstep 5. for 30seconds the approx. tobe 4, set. Afterdevice step youhave ofthe onthereceiver Press button the < hand-held transmitter and the mem- the and transmitter hand-held the between distance required The 2 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. slowlyafter flashes 1 depends on the system of the the of system the on depends 2 flashes: all stored all stored flashes: 1 . 1 for approx. 1 2 is now now is 1 flashes flashes of the the of 1 93 of
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Practical interior accessories cooled. Opening compartment Glove 94 of arrow. the in thedirection theswitch Rotate Opening function cooling if the and, be ventilated can compartment glove the equipment, vehicle's your on Depending Ventilation* system, trol topage refer theremote con- key tolock integrated the Use MINI Convertible: locking driven. being is vehicle the while use Fold cover up. Closing on. comes compartment lightin theglove The thecover. toopen thebutton Press dent, close the glove compartment after after compartment theglove close dent, ofan acci- injury in prevent the event To * is switched on, can also be be also can on, switched is 26 . < adapter > > > > connecting: when thefollowing Observe the top. toward glovecompartment, of the side ontheright is located USBconnection The page update, refer to device, e.g. software age fromaUSBstor- data forimporting Connection USB interface for data transmission partment. result com- glove may in the temperatures high conditioning orthe automatic climate control, theair of setting temperature the on Depending position. vertical the in itis until arrow the of direction theopposite in switch the Rotate Closing opened fully by pushing it back and lifting it. lifting and back it pushing by fully opened be can and rails guide along slides cover The Opening mobile phone base plate forthe orthecover acompartment either tains con- seats thefront between armrest center The Storage compartment Center armrest* external devices. external torecharge interface USB notusethe Do discs. hard USB connect not Do interface. audio totheUSB lamps asfansor such devices notconnect Do interface. audio theUSB into tor theconnec- plugging force when not use Do 148 * . . * or thesnap-in Nets nexttotherear seats. are located Convertible theMINI in compartments map The on the backs of the front seat backrests. seat front the of backs the on > next to the rear seats and in the center console center the in and seats rear the to next inthedoors, storage compartments find will you vehicle's onyour equipment, Depending theIn interior vehicle compartments Storage > speakers. thevehicle over recordings audio play and orMP3 player a CD as You can connect an external audio device such device audio forexternal Connection forward. thecover Push Closing USB audio interface USB audio AUX-IN port, AUX-IN topage port, refer * are located in the passenger footwell and and footwell thepassenger in located are * , refer to page to refer , 141 142 * . > use while the vehicle is being driven. being is vehicle the while use position. original its into back cover the Push Closing thecover. of edge bottom pressthe Briefly Opening passenger side* Storage compartment on the front > options: storage thefollowing have you vehicle's onyour equipment, Depending theIn area cargo swerving. or ofcase heavy sudden braking e.g. in occupants, the car's endanger could they otherwise, fromthe hooks; heavy objects hang compartment. passenger rear the in handles grab the on hooks clothes are There hooks Clothes be locked. cannot storage compartment The MINI Convertible wall Net area ofthecargo walls ping or tote bags on the left and right side- eyes and thehook and eyes tothe lashing objects;smaller for attaching Hooks dent, close the storage compartment after after compartment storage closethe dent, acci- ofan in injury theevent To prevent must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not not Do view. driver's the obstruct not must thehooks hung from ofclothing Items * on the rear cargo well and side trim for for trim side and well cargo rear the on * for hanging up items such items up such as forhanging shop- * on the cargo areaside- cargo the on < < 95
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Practical interior accessories Cupholders and ashtray* and Cupholders 96 back out. The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops lighter. thecigarette press in on, running With theignitionthe or engine switched Lighter ashtray. theentire Remove Emptying center console. the in cupholders of the one in located is ashtray The Ashtray* damage it. event of an accident. in the injuryrisk of an increased is there erwise, thecenter console. of back the rear at the is in console; another center Two cupholders are located in the front of the Cupholders into the cupholder. Otherwise, you may may you Otherwise, thecupholder. into forcibly containers unsuitable push not Do Oth- hot beverages. nottransport do and containers nonbreakable lightweight, Use < < Remove thelighter Remove Cigarettesocket lighter or shape size. unsuitable toinsertplugs of attempting thesockets by ing damag- Avoid available. is sockets following the asoneof aslong volts, at 12 watts 200 approx. etc., upas carcleaner, a to flashlight, vacuum such devices electrical use can you MINI, your In appliances electrical Connecting Pull out the cover. MINI Convertible Pull out the cover. MINI incargoPower area socket lighter and burn themselves. cigarette the operate cannot children that so key the remove always car, the leaving When areas resultin could burns.other the knob only. Holding or touching only. in ortouching the it knob Holding Holdor touch the hotcigarette lighterby * or cover fromthesocket. or cover < 97
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communication
MOBILITY
REFERENCE Things to remember when driving economy of operation for your vehicle. your for of operation economy and life service theoptimal toachieve in order below instructions the follow Please other. each to adjust to time breaking-in need parts Moving period Break-in Things to rememberwhen driving 100 engage the clutch gently. break-in km. During this period, miles/500 300 ofapprox. driven adistance only after level clutch its reaches of optimal function the The Clutch period. break-in this during cautiously rotors. Drive and contactand wear patternsbetween brake pads km to achieveoptimized miles/500 approx. 300 of period break-in initial an require Brakes Brake system km. miles/300 200 first Therefore, the drive during period. cautiously break-in aninitial after until potential tion theirfull trac- notachieve tires do manufacture, with their factors associated to technical Due Tires increased. gradually be can speeds vehicle and Engine km miles/2,000 1,200 driving After mode. kickdown transmission's useofthe and operation full-throttle Avoid > thefollowing: exceed not do but speeds, road and engine atvarying Drive km miles/2,000 Up to 1,200 Always obey all official speed limits. differential and Engine ,0 p r10mh10km/h mph/160 4,500 rpm or 100 engine Gasoline 2. 1. open: theliftgate with drive to essary specialIf circumstancesabsolutely nec- make it compartment. thepassenger into flow gasmay exhaust In addition, maneuver. sive eva- and orabraking accident eventof an the in thevehicle road damage or may users other there is arisk there of burns. Otherwise, pipes. tail exhaust hot touch not Do damage. property and injuries personal ous ofseri- therisk toa lead fire, with could contact etc. Such leaves,hay, grass, as such materials ble flamma- highly any and hotexhaust system the ing, take care to avoid possible contact between park- while and atidle standing driving, When tothem. undercoating apply never tem, and sys- oftheexhaust sections tovarious adjacent shields theheat installed notremove tem. Do Close the liftgate driving notes General life. operating vehicle's of the in course the be renewed have to above mentioned components if of any the observed should be procedures samebreak-in The replacement part Following Hot exhaust system exhaust Hot automatic climate control, page the of rate flow air the increase nificantly sig- and mode therecirculated-air off Switch Close theglasssunroof Close and windows all to do so may endanger passengers or passengers somayendanger to do Failure closed. liftgate with the drive Only tures are generated on the exhaust sys- exhaust the on generated are tures tempera- high in all vehicles, extremely As < 90 < . * . refer to page to refer Assist, Hill using off driving on information For wear will clutch wise, greater result. maybetransmission damaged. electrical the and engine, vehicle's systems the the Otherwise, most. the at speed walking at depth on page toTread referalso thetires, on depth tread declining risk with increases The of hydroplaning properly. braked or steered be thecarcannot so theroad surface, that with oftirecontact loss orcomplete partial cause can hydroplaning, situation,face. as known This sur- road and tires between form can water of ing one or onto objects. other oneoronto ing anexist- onto mats floor additional notplace Do pedals during driving. ofthe function inhibit may the they otherwise, pedals Objects in the movement range of the properly. functioning is ABS that indicates regulation, ofhydraulic sound the with together pedal, ofthebrake pulsation The steering effort. of mum with still obstacles possible can a mini- avoid you responsiveness, steering maintains vehicle pressure. the Since brake maximum using brake situation which requires full braking, it isbest to ABS. If with are in isYour you MINI equipped a safely Braking Parking brake oninclines water through Driving Hydroplaning the clutch; use the parking brake. Other- brake. usetheparking clutch; the with thevehicle hold not do inclines, On only then and cm, ft/30 than 1 deeper not is it if only road the on water through Drive not,awedge do you If speed. road reduce roads, slushy or wet on driving When out of the movement range of the pedals; pedals; the of range movement the of out objects other and carpet, mats, floor Keep 73 184 . . < < < impaired. pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be the thearea around into toprotrude objects other or any carpets mats, floor allow Never tothebrakes or steering. assistance power there will be or no notbepresent will action ing brak- engine otherwise, switched off; engine the sion, page sion, transmis- automatic of the mode inmanual ing system.Downshift- brake the on loads excessive placing you Thissary. avoid strategy helps neces- if tofirstgear all way the down, shifting by effect braking engine's the increase can You brake failure. even possibly wearand brake temperatures, high to lead can pressure brake consistent but light Even required. is braking least the which in gear downhill drive inlong orsteep the gradients Hills needed. itis when able Then full brakingforce willbe immediately avail- helps dry the padsand rotorstoensure that process in generated this users.Theheat road other notendanger does this maneuver that toensure conditions miles.traffic few Monitor every pedal pressurebrake the on gentle exert briefly rain, is heavy there or are wet roads When inwetDriving conditions for cleaning. for e.g. removed, been have they after again tened fas- aresecurely mats floor surethatthe Make for approved been have fastened. be appropriately can and vehicle the that mats floor use Only with the transmission in neutral or with in neutral thetransmission with held down, theclutch drive with Never reduced efficiency of the brake system, system, ofthebrake efficiency reduced resulting and the overheating To prevent < 53 < . < 101
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Things to remember when driving assume the form blowout. sudden theform of a assume can result ultimate The tires. the inside develops damage which at therate increases and heating toover- lead can Overloading thevehicle. load cure. to will fail application extended even that effect apulsating with torespond will tend brakes rotors,the formonthe brake corrosion Should reached. not during brake applications to clean the rotors is pressure which must be exerted by the pads theminimum because This pads. occurs brake the on accumulate contaminants while rotors, on form to corrosion for tendency increased is an there frequent, areless applications brake where conditions inoperating and atall, used is not thevehicle when periods extended during is driven only thevehicle occasionally, When Corrosion on brake rotors 102 Cargo loading engine compartment. the in noise generate will This off. switched torun engine timeis after the for continue some may pump thecoolant S, Cooper theMINI In normal. therefore are vehicle under the water ofcondensed Traces vehicle. the under exits then and operation, in is control climate theautomatic while forms Condensation When the vehicle is parked could damage thevehicle. damage could asthey spills area Avoid fluid in thecargo over- capacity, never carrying approved their beyond tires the loading avoid To < < 2. 1. removed. be can cover the luggage, bulky load To raised. is theroll-up cover you the liftgate, open When thecover. damage may orthey swerving, sudden or braking of case the in e.g. occupants, swerving and endanger the occupants. the endanger and swerving or braking ofsharp inevent the around thrown be properly. Otherwise, could cargo engage Cargo areacover MINI: cargo area 2. 1. area. thecargo toexpand separately folded is rearsetbackrest split.The can Bothsides be cargo area the Expanding rear. the toward the holders of out cover the Pull theliftgate. theliftstraps from Unhook Fold rear seat backrests forward. rearseat Fold backrests lever. the Pull otherwise, they could endanger the the car's endanger could they otherwise, thecover; on objects any notplace Do sure that the seat's locking mechanisms mechanisms locking theseat's that sure make up, back backrest the folding When < < damage the cover or the convertible top. ortheconvertible thecover damage their protective features may be ineffective. may features protective their systemsin vehicle restraint therear of as the 2. 1. up. it folding topand ible theconvert- releasing by easily vehicle more the load can you closed, is top convertible the When Loading aid Convertible:MINI compartment luggage 1. angle. toasteeper backrests seat thesplit rear raising by area cargo the Expand Adjusting rear seat backrest* 3. 2. Lift the convertible top, see arrow top, seearrow theconvertible Lift dles, seearrows thehan- top using theconvertible Release thelever,arrow Pull Fold back the back backrest untilFold it engages. audibly engages, arrow engages, audibly until it lock backrest the leverof the up Fold forward. backrest compartment roller cover, as this may asthis cover, may roller compartment luggage objects the on any notplace Do a steeper angle, do not install child at positioned are therearseat backrests If 1 . 1 , and fold the rear seat 2 . 2 . < < 1. top is closed. theconvertible when ume vol- compartment theluggage enlarge You can volume compartment theluggage Expanding tion. 3. 2. 2. 1. backrest canbe folded down. therear objects, larger transport to able To be Through-loading system 3. 3. Loading aid. Loading to refer top upward, theconvertible Fold arrows arrows areas, see storage theupper cover into Push arrows see upward, wardoutof the lower brackets and pivot rear- cover roller compartment luggage Pull together with the belt strap. thebelt with together button Press the backrest lock open to key integrated usethe necessary, If Fold the backrest forward. thebackrest Fold holders on them thehandles place back and Fold < cargo area cover back back cover its area cargo to lower posi- the top, move theconvertible To operate 2 3 and place down horizontally. . 2 and fold down backrest backrest down fold and 1 . 1 , 103
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Things to remember when driving 4. 3. 2. closed. belt loop, refer to page guide The occupants. to apotential hazard posing maneuvers, sive eva- or braking sudden during compartment ger the passen- fromentering cargo toprevent fail securely. might engages A loosebackrest catch 104 1. limit cargo Determining vehicle operating conditions. operating vehicle unstable produce and thevehicle damage lbs. could this Otherwise, kgorYYY XXX ,0 b.mns70ls 5 lbs. 650 lbs. = 750 lbs. minus 1,400 lbs: 650 able cargo and luggage load capacity is of avail- theamount vehicle, in your sengers pas- lbs. 150 will four be there lbs. and 1,400 XXX equals if example, For amount the capacity. load luggage and ofcargo amount equals available the resulting figure The pounds. XXXkilograms orYYY from passengers and driver of the weight thecombined Subtract your vehicle. driver and passengers that will be riding in the of weight combined the Determine vehicle's placard vehicle's your on statement thefollowing Locate original position, always ensure that the thatthe ensure always position, original into its back thebackrest folding When < and cargo should never exceed exceed never should cargo and ofoccupants weight combined The * : < 45 , must be be , must Load > > > > Stowing cargo transported. can be cargo/luggage less the occupants, the of weight the greater The cargo. of the weight the and weights pants' is sumoftheoccu- permissible load the The 6. 5. backrests. the of edge top the than higher stack not Do buckle. opposite respective safetynot each occupied, belt secure in the seatis rear the when cargo very heavy For corners. and edges sharp Cover backrests. seat rear the behind directly possible, ideally as ward for- aslow as far and objects heavy Position load capacityload of yourvehicle. luggage and cargo theavailable reduce may this how atrailer determine to transporting to yourvehicle. Consultthe manualfor of part trailer, a will transferred trailer be your from load the towing be will vehicle your If 4. step in cargo and luggage load capacity calculated available the exceed not safely may weight on That loaded the being vehicle. cargo and luggage of weight combined the Determine Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle vehicle gross approved the notexceed Do arenecessary.braking or swerves sudden forexample if car'soccupants, ger the > > cargo Securing MINI Convertible MINI the load-securing devices. load-securing the with enclosed information the with Comply area. cargo ofthe wall forward onthe located are them of Two straps. cargo the attaching for dealer.MINI lashing eyes Four are provided at your are available objects heavier and Heavy-duty cargo straps cargo Heavy-duty retaining or draw straps draw or retaining smaller lighter using Secure items and described above, so that it cannot sothat it endan- cannot above, described as cargo the secure and position Always * * . for securing larger larger securing for tions supplied supplied therack system. tions with instruc- installation the with you. Comply advise MINI will MINI. your glad dealer Your to be for an option as available is system rack special A rack* luggage Roof-mounted MINI: should always be placed at the bottom. items in large area. Heavy notbe too should The roof load must be distributed uniformly and page on under Weights data theapplicable find You can therack. loading when ortheaxleloads weight gross vehicle approved the capacity, roof load approved the exceed notto remember always therefore You should response. steering and handling vehicle on effect amajor have they loaded, when gravity of center raise racks the vehicle's roof Because rack luggage roof-mounted Loading Remove the cover panel. points Mounting points for thetether strap, page thefastening using notsecure pants.cargo Do theoccu- etc.,and swerves, endanger sudden around, for example as a result of heavy braking, thrown be could they since thecar, loose inside carried should orhard not objects be Heavy regulations. use and construction the with compliance bein will not vehicle the and safety is nolongerassured operating vehicle's become damaged.become weight and axle loads, page 217 . < 217 ; otherwise, the ; otherwise, 48 ; they may may ; they 105
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Things to remember when driving braking maneuvers, and take corners gently. corners take and maneuvers, braking Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and during thetrip. off fromshifting orfalling it to prevent securely correctly cargo and roof-mounted Fasten occur. can damage otherwise, liftgate; ofthe area swiveling the into protrude objects no that and of glass the sunroof for themovement space sufficient there is that sure make loading, When 106 ating temperature. oper- its reach to engine cold the for way fastest the is This speeds. engine moderate at but away, right driving the Start stationary. remains vehicle while up warm to engine the for wait not Do offimmediatelyDrive tirewear. and tion fuel consump- togreater leads thus and tance increases rolling inflation pressure Low resis- ing on a long trip. start- before and amonth twice least at pressure inflation tire correct necessary, if and, Check Check tire inflation pressure regularly consumption. fuel increase and namics its aerody- affect onthevehicle parts Attached them. using not are you whenever racks luggage auxiliary mirrors, roof- orrear-mounted Remove use in longer no parts attached Remove consumption. fuel increases weight Additional cargo unnecessary Remove impact. ontheenvironmental and tion consump- onfuel aninfluence have can nance mainte- regular and style driving your measures, of certain Theimplementation factors. ferent ofdif- onanumber depends Fuel consumption fuel Saving Coasting wear. reduces and fuel consumption As a rule: driving at low speeds engine lowers speed. constant shift to the highest suitable gear and drive at you desired your traveling speed, reach When up shift early. and speeds engine engine and road speed. In doing so, avoid high toasuitable smoothly gears, accelerate higher and fordriving second off. In gear only first Use Avoid highengine speeds consumption. fuel situations reduces traffic impending anticipating and smoothly Driving driving ahead. vehicle the to distance asuitable maintaining Avoid unnecessary acceleration andbraking by Think ahead whiledriving MINI Maintenance System, page dealer. by aMINI the Also serviced vehicle note the having ofyour recommends MINI ufacturer man- The life. vehicle a long and economy good toachieve serviced regularly vehicle your Have serviced vehicle the Have jams. traffic in or crossings lights, railroad traffic at e.g. periods, lengthy for stopping when theengine off Switch stops lengthy Switch off the engineduring vehicle is coasting. the iswhen shutoffautomatically Fuel supply gear. accelerator andlet the vehicle coast in asuitable off takeyour the adownhillfoot gradient, On to a halt in the highest suitable gear. coast vehicle the let and theaccelerator off foot your light, take aredtraffic approaching When 191 . 107
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communication
MOBILITY
REFERENCE Navigation system occupants and other road users danger. road in and other occupants place you in violation of the law and put vehicle can tothis precaution totake Failure system. thenavigation by issued the instructions and conditions road and traffic between tradiction con- ofany intheevent regulations traffic cable destination. entered toevery you sensors,and reliablylites vehicle can guide and ofsatel- theaid with thevehicle, of position cise pre- the determine can system navigation The information General Navigation system 110 > > > > > > > depending on the volume of data. hours, several take can thedata Updating center. MINI your from code tion activa- an and data navigation obtain can You can be updated. and thevehicle arestored in data Navigation information General Navigation data removed after the update. the after removed be can data navigation the with medium The system restarts. the iscomplete, process updating the After in thevehicle. arestored data The update. the of status the to as inquire can You updating. during areavailable system of navigation the functions themain Only interruption. an after continued is trip a when automatically resumed is update The drain on the battery. Update data while driving to reduce the ary, and always give priority to the appli- the to priority give always and ary, station- vehicle withthe only data Enter < * > > on-board computer: the on displayed is information following The 1. updates the navigation data as you drive asyou data thenavigation updates restarts and system the todrive, begin you After 4. 3. 2. 1. Updating the navigation data 3. 2. 1. data onnavigation Information refer to page to refer principles operating for computer, On-board navigation To select destination list destination the off: switch is guidance destination When view map or arrow the guidance: destination During "Navigation" Begin driving. device. storage theUSB of code theactivation Enter computer. on-board the on instructions the Follow partment. com- glove the in interface USB the into data navigation device with aUSBstorage Insert played. Information about the data version is dis- version": system "Navigation Open "Options". "Navigation" 16 . * . to start the destination guidance, page guidance, thedestination start to After selecting yourdestination youcan proceed > > > > > > features: thefollowing with you systemalsosupports The 2. 1. accessed quickly. can streetnames be namesand town/city stored that so automatically entry your pletes com- and spellings different enter to possible match principle, refer to page the word- with supported youare names, street and names it entertown/city easier to To make entry destination Manual > > options: following the among from select can you destination your entering In Destination entry Entering destinationvia voice*,page topage address, refer home Selecting page map,to refer via destination the Entering refer to page Special destinations, destinations, page Last or city. ofatown area downtown tothe you guide will system the street, a enter not do you If "Enter address" "Navigation" page book, Selecting destination from address seebelow entry, destination Manual 116 113 114 118 . This makes it makes . This 114 119 117 114 . 3. 1. Entering atown/city 3. 2. 1. Entering astate/province 2. > eette symbol. the Select necessary: spaces, if enter To enteranew letter. you time each smaller grows gradually list The If entermore letters. necessary, city. ordisplayed Code" "Town/City/Postal Select country. displayed or "State/Province" Select "Enter address" "Navigation" > > letters: delete To Display. ontheControl ter appears A list with let- all starting this of towns/cities Select letters, if necessary. for your newdestination. your for beretained should entries if the current city town/ and country of entry the skip can You unteMN osikt ihih and press and hold the MINI joystick. highlight to joystick Turn theMINI letters:numbers or deleteTo all and press the MINI joystick. highlight to joystick Turn theMINI or letters: numbers individual To delete 111
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Destination entry 4. 112 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. number Alternative: entering street and house 3. 2. 1. name: same the with streets several are there If streetorthehousenumber. cross the enter also can you street, the enter you After 2. 1. Entering street intersectionand 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Entering the postal code cities and select a name. and of towns list the to change necessary, If Change tothelist of housenumbers. Change digits. the Select number" "House town/city. the entered you way thestreet same the Enter street. displayed or "Street" Select street. the Select street. Highlight switch tothe list of street names. to theright toward joystick MINI the Move town/city. the would as you intersection astreetand Enter street. displayed or "Street" Select The corresponding destination is displayed. Select thezip code. code. postal the Highlight cities. towns/ and codes postal of list the to Change symbol. individually. digits the Select the Select city. ordisplayed Code" "Town/City/Postal Select 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. town/city. ofthe part another to it belongs forexample, because, destination, entered notexist desiredin streetdoes the the entry can be canceled. This may be practical if entered, this been has already atown/city If name. street the after displayed is town/city related The selection. for are offered country entered the of streets all case this In town/city. adestination ing enter- without a street toenter possible isalso It town/city Entering astreet without a destination > 2. 1. entering the destination Starting destination guidance after 6. Select the street. the Select street. Highlight tothelist of streetnames. Change letters. the Select country. Select "In" with the currently displayed tothelist of streetnames. Change street. displayed or "Street" Select address" "Enter "Navigation" page refer to preference", "Route Setting tion". destina- asanother or "Add "Start guidance" destination" "Accept numbers. orrange of number Select house a house 119 . 4. 3. 2. 1. book address adestination the Selecting from To create contacts, refer to page book Address > address" or Select address" "Business "Home search". the"A-Z using Select in the a listcontact orif sodesired, page need to be checked as destinations, refer to mobile phone If the contacts with addresses from the tinations. asdes- been checked have these addresses if aredisplayed with addresses Contacts "Address book" "Navigation" page to refer atloc.", Interest of "Points for Search 165 114 . . * are not displayed, they first first they displayed, not are 165 . 2. 1. destination. the entering after book in theaddress destination the Store book Storing adestination inthe address 6. 5. 4. 3. 3. 2. 1. address book. the can stored in be position Your current Storing the position 5. 4. contact". as newcontact" to existing "Store or"Add Open "Options". "Store invehicle" "Store if wish. you name" "First name and first name" "Last Enter address" address" or"Home "Business Enter ifavailable. contact, existing an Select to contact". position or"Add ascontact" position "Store Open "Options". "Navigation" "Store invehicle" "Store name. first and last the enter and address of type the list or the from contact ing ontheselection, select anexist- Depending 113
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Destination entry 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. deletingEditing or anaddress 114 2. 1. Accessing last destinations a destination for destination guidance. as used and up called be can destinations These automatically. arestored last The destinations destinations Last address, page home the as contact a Specifying to Refer tion. asadestina- be stored homeaddress must The destination as address home Using 3. 2. 1. 4. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry". or"Delete in"Edit Contacts" Open "Options". entry. the Highlight book" "Address "Navigation" "Last destinations" "Last "Navigation" "Home" book" "Address "Navigation" "Start guidance" 166 . 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. entry. ofan existing thehousenumber change to example, for edited, be can Destinations Editing a destination 2. 1. destinations search special for Accessing areusing. you data tion guidance to the corresponding location. destination and ofstart interest, hotel place or can e.g.a for aspecial search You destination, Special destinations 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Deleting the last destinations 4. 3. "Edit destination" "Edit Open "Options". destination. the Highlight destinations" "Last "Navigation" search. Select "Points of Interest" "Navigation" tions". destina- last all "Delete or entry" "Delete Open "Options". destination. the Highlight destinations" "Last "Navigation" "Start guidance" destination. the Select depends on the particular set of naviga- of set particular the on depends provided of information The scope < 10. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Category search 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. A-Z search tion". destina- asanother "Add or guidance" "Start symbol. the Select are displayed. Details destination. special the Select displayed. destinations is thespecial A list of "Start search" details. joystick toward the left toMINI exit category the details. category to select several Move possible itis destinations, special some For details" "Category category. Select "Category" Select orenter town/city. destination" "Search search" "Category ifdesired. established, be can connection a available, is number aphone If pages. the through scroll details arestored,If then can you several tion". destina- asanother "Add or guidance" "Start symbol. the Select destination. special the Select displayed. destinations is thespecial A list of Enter keyword "Keyword" or details. joystick toward the left toMINI exit category the details. category to select several Move possible itis destinations, special some For details" "Category "Category" "Town/City" search" "A-Z 6. 5. 4. 3. > > > > options. various among select from can destination, you thesearch input As you destinationSpecial location 2. 1. destinations Starting the search for special able, a connection can be established, if desired. if established, be can connection a able, avail- is number phone a If pages. the through you scroll can arestored, then details several If tion". destina- asanother "Add or guidance" "Start symbol. the Select destination. special the Select destination. special Highlight "Along route" "Along destination" different "At destination" "At location" current "At > > > displayed. destinations is thespecial A list of search" "Start and thecategory. scale onthemap The display depends symbols. display as map indisplayed the are category theselected of Destinations point. fromthesearch distance of order their in displayed are destinations special The route" "Along tion", destina- different "At destination", "At destination. the pointing with a toward arrow direction displayed are and distance oftheir order in displayed are destinations special The location" current "At 115
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Destination entry 4. 3. 2. 1. map: the in display of destinations symbols To the special map Displaying special destinations inthe 116 3. cle. of the showsthe position vehi- current The map 2. 1. the Selecting destination themap. aid of the with destination you enter the can street, then or destination ofa thelocation know only you If via map destination the Entering 5. can be established, ifdesired. established, be can connection a available, is number phone a If "Display Points of Interest" of Points "Display Open "Options". "Map" "Navigation" "Map" "Navigation" settings. the Select "Interactive map" the destination are displayed. in thevicinity or street name of coordinates the street,thena any detect does not thesystem If theSpecifying street IIjoystick: MINI the pressing by other functions alsoaccess can You shifted. be can section map visible the and adjusted be can scale the map, interactive the In Additional functions 5. 4. > > > > > > > items. menu additional todisplay joystick MINI the Press > > > cross-hairs. the with destination the Select rent position is displayed. is position rent thecur- map around of The section the location" current "Display is displayed. nation the desti- around map the of section The destination" "Display display Map map" interactive "Exit guid- "Start symbol and ifance" necessary. Select the special destinations is started. is destinations special for search the interest": of points "Find guidance" symbol:or "Start destination". asanother "Add Select the inadrtt h IIjoystick. theMINI rotate and tion direc- corresponding the in joystick MINI the move diagonally: map Shifting direction. corresponding the joystick in MINI Moving move map: the joystick. turntheMINI scale: Changing 3. 2. settings. language > > > > entire word entire beas an spelled entered or can town/city The Entering atown/city > theSaying entries > information General voice* via destination Entering sary, spell at least the first three letters. three first the least at spell sary, if neces- or ofthetown/city thename Say city. for town/ the prompt forthesystem Wait > aloud: aloud: read thepossible spoken commands Having computer. on-board the possible to switch between voice input and is it voice, by destination a entering When sive emphasis and pauses. and emphasis sive exces- avoid and smoothly theletters Speak language. thesystem from different ofthearea isSpell theentry language if the English. be must thesystemlanguage as a complete word, state ina US adestination toenter Example: guage, refertopage guage, words entire lan-or spelled thesystem in asan spoken aloud be can sections either inter- streets,and towns/cities, Countries, refertopage, system, activation Voice 1. igation data in use and the country and and thecountry in useand data igation nav- the on depend entry of methods The page to refer interest", of points "Find { City { Voice commands * 114 } . or . { Spell city < 70 } . . } 21 . entered: be 2,000 can number the to up numbers house Depending on the data in the navigation system, number house Entering town/city. the as way thesame in is entered intersection streetor The Entering astreet or intersection If necessary, select this entry with with this entry select necessary, If dots. three by city followed piled in a separate list and displayed as a town/ eetd n rs h IIjoystick. press theMINI selected, and is destination the until joystick MINI the Turn computer: theon-board via also town/city can selected fromThe be the list list. this in city/town desired the select 4. 3. 2. 1. 4. be differentiated by the system are com- are system the by differentiated be that cannot towns/cities Similar-sounding { { number. thehouse Say { > > > > > city/town: Select Accept destination Accept Yes House number House Spell the entry: entry: the Spell { entries inTo showother the list: e.g. entry, To selectan Select other city/town: city/town: other Select { town/city: recommended a To select next page Yes } to confirm the number. the house toconfirm } } } { } Spell city { { { Yes New entry Entry … Entry } < } . Then . Then 117 } }
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Destination entry Further intermediate destinations can be added. destinations intermediate further Adding startsimmediately. guidance Destination guidance destination Starting 118 2. 1. foronetrip. entered be can destinations intermediate 30 of maximum A Entering intermediate destinations page input, Destination to refer first, entered be must destination trip trip. The for a entered be can destinations intermediate Various New trip tions destina- intermediate with atrip Planning thelast of destinations. thelist to added automatically is destination The destinationSaving enter the intermediate destination. intermediate the enter Select the type of destination entry and "Navigation" { { Start guidance Addanother as destination 111 . } } Word-matching principle Word-matching guidance" "Start destinations: all intermediate entering After Startingtrip the > > > include: benefits user The response. instant for basis the as vehicle the in stored data the with entries destination your checks, runs system comparing ongoing The orstreets. oftowns toenter names the easier principle it system's makes word-matching The 4. 3. existent names and and addresses. names existent non accept will The system the vehicle. not in arestored entries selection ofthat name letters onlyfor those system offers The identification. toensureunambiguous ters are available let- enough assoon automatically them complete will streetscities the system and towns/ of names the entering are you When "Monaco". spelling Italian the or "Munich" spelling English the can you enter also of"München", Instead Example: in other countries. is customary form that if usea you names fromtheofficial ently differ- entered be also can names Town/city destination is to be inserted. be to is destination wherethe intermediate location Select the "Add as another destination" > > > 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. "Resume guidance" "Resume resumed. be can guidance destination trip, last the during reached was not thedestination If guidance route Continuing 4. 3. 2. 1. theIn arrow or map view guidance destination Terminating page to refer principles for operating computer, On-board guidance destination Starting Destination guidance board computer, if so desired. on- the on displayed is display arrow The map aredisplayed view. in the arrival of time theestimated and ate destination The distance to thedestination/intermedi- puter. iscom- ontheon-board route The displayed guidance" "Start destination" "Accept destination. the Select "Enter address" "Navigation" "Stop guidance" "Stop symbol. the Select "Map" "Navigation" 16 . currently in currently in use. remotecontrol stored settings for the are The > > > > > > information General criteria Route 4. 3. 2. 1. route criteria Changing refer to page to refer information, traffic with guidance Route trol currently in use. con- remote the for stored are settings The experience. personal from differ can route proposed The highways. ning, avoiding e.g. inrouteplan- account into aretaken and data ofthenavigation arepart Street types route guidance. during and input nation Route criteria can be changed during desti- criteria. certain selecting routeby thecalculated influence can You > acriterion: Selecting "Map" "Navigation" > > > guidance. route routesduring alternate additional of suggestions routes": "Alternative account. into time taking ble route. shortestpossi- and of thefastest nation driving. rapid allow bledistance and stretchesof road that possi- least of the acombination through "Short route": short distance without without shortdistance "Short route": "Fast route": time-optimized route time-optimized route": "Fast "Efficient route": optimized combi- optimized route": "Efficient "Route preference" 125 . 119
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Destination guidance time fortheroute. time thecalculation prolong can this then selected, offuture routes. planning the to routeand tothecurrent applies setting The 5. 120 > > > > guidance: route during displayed is information following The Arrow display > > > guidance: route during oftheroute available views arevarious There Route > > > avoided on the route. Where possible,the selectedcriteria willbe Select additional route criteria, if desired. Lane information. Lane view. Intersection direction. of thenext Small arrow:indicates change oftravel. direction current arrow: Large refertopage view, Map page refer to towns/cities, of streetsand List Arrow display "Avoid toll roads", or "Avoid ferries" are ferries" or"Avoid toll roads", "Avoid "Avoid theroute criteria If highways", ble. possi- where ferries ferries": avoid "Avoid possible. where roads toll avoid roads": toll "Avoid where possible. highways avoid highways": "Avoid 120 < 121 3. 2. 1. route. the of segment each for displayed are bulletins traffic and traveled be to distance The route. the on towns/cities display alistcan and of theroads you then started, hasbeen routeguidance the If List of roads or towns/cities on the route > > gle. trian- a with marked each are roads multi-lane of lanes recommended the arrow display, the In Lane information 2. 1. route. totheoriginal returning before to travel so,doing youwill specify manykilometers how In segments. route certain system to bypass the navigation prompt routeguidance, During Taking detours > > > Highlight a section. a Highlight information" "Route "Navigation" changes. lane additional however, also be possible to briefly make It can, lane. possible likewise triangle: Empty lane. optimum triangle: Filled "Route information" "Route "Navigation" Street name of the next change of of direction. nextchange of the Street name ofdirection. change next the to Distance information. Traffic 4 3 2 1 Overview 2. 1. viewDisplaying map Map display 4. 3. 2. 1. bypassed: be nolonger theroutesection should If theResuming route original 5. 4. 3. Planned route Planned obstruction fortraffic sign Road obstruction with traffic segment Route Toolbar "Map" "Navigation" blocking" "Remove for:" route "New information" "Route "Navigation" joystick. MINI the Press mileage. enterthedesired joystick: MINI the Turn for:" route "New Traffic information, topage refer information, Traffic > > signs obstructions. classify the Road obstruction. the of direction the indicates angles depending on map scale. The direction of the tri- traffic obstructions, segments with route Smallroute triangles planned identify the along Traffic obstructions depicted with thin lines. and ferry connections. National borders are railroad lines represent classification. Dotted totheir colors different linesand according with aredepicted In view, streetsand roads map the Lines theon map > > joystick. Show/hide: press theMINI Status boxes map. the on is displayed route theplanned isstarted, guidance route After route Planned 7 6 5 travel. of routeordirection planned relate to the not does obstruction the sign: road Gray ordirection travel. of route planned relatestothe sign: theobstruction road Red time, and distance from destination. guidance, traffic information status, arrival route active for symbol box: status Lower details. entertainment Upper statusbox: time, phone details,and Lower statusbox Lower Upper statusbox location Current 123 . 121
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Destination guidance > > the map map view: the in directly areavailable functions following The Toolbar 122 destination. and thelocation between path AUTO is displayed. The map shows the entire scale the until direction either in joystick MINI turnthe north, facing view themap In Automatic scaling of the map 2. 1. Changing scale Changing map scale Symbol "Interactive map" "Interactive n oaeteMN joystick. theMINI rotate and direction corresponding the in joystick MINI Shifting map diagonally:move the direction. corresponding joystick in the map:Moving themove MINI hnigsae unteMN joystick. MINI the turn scale: Changing joy- MINI the press and symbol stick. the Select Changing scale Changing display or arrow views map Adjusting map Interactive Displaying traffic bulletins nation forSearching special desti- routealternatives selecting routecriteria or Changing tions on/off instruc- voice Switching tion guidance destina- Starting/stopping Function 3. 2. 1. side of the map display. view can be displayed additionally on the right When destination guidance is active, the arrow Displaying arrow view in map display 2. 1. use. in currently theremote control arestored for settings The Settings for the map display is arrowdisplay shown. The "Arrowdisplay on map" Open "Options". "Navigation" > > "Settings" Open "Options". tinations are no longer displayed. longer no are tinations des-special the for Symbols fic bulletins. The map is optimized for displaying traf- "Traffic conditions/gray map conditions/gray "Traffic account. taken into isnot thissetting then isactivated, map" conditions/gray If"Traffic conditions. onlight depending adjust and Select mode" "Day/night "* rently inrently use. cur- control remote the for stored is setting The sources. audio the of volume the of independent is volume This 2. 1. instruction is being issued. avoice only bewhile adjusted volumecan The Adjusting for instructions volume voice 4. 3. 2. 1. avoiceinstructionRepeating 3. 2. 1. routeguidance. during off and on switched be can instructions voice The voiceinstructions on/off Switching voice instructions via guidance Destination Symbol select the desired volume. desired the select to instruction thevoice during knob the Turn sary. instruction, thelastvoice if neces- Repeat twice. joystick MINI the Press symbol. the Highlight "Map" "Navigation" symbol. the Select "Map" "Navigation" off switched instructions Voice on switched instructions Voice Meaning Provisions End-User TimeReal Traffic Information culated route. cal- the to relates information traffic if red turns list. orasanevent display map the in displayed information traffic the have can you active, is guidance destination whether of inIrrespective route planning. account into taken shownand automatically is take to areplanning routeyou the to relevant tion informa- traffic the guidance, destination During updated periodically. is information traffic the centers and control traffic by monitored are conditions traffic The stations. radio by transmitted is that information traffic can areas,you receive congested many In Overview Traffic information* ful activities by you in connection herewith. in connection you by activities ful or unlaw- unauthorized (c) any and/or directive network,(b) ofthis your violation RDS-TMC the or data incident useofthetraffic thorized directlyarise orindirectly out of (a) unau- your that expenses other or costs damages, claims, all and any against their affiliates) Inc (and Inrix, Network, Traffic Total and NA") ("MINI LLC. ica, Amer- ofNorth MINI hold harmless and defend indemnify, to agree You data. incident traffic of portion any way any in distribute or transmit republish, duplicate, reproduce, to method other oruseany copy, scan notmodify, may You is it delivered. which through network RDS-TMC and data incident traffic rightstothe the holds Network") Traffic ("Total Inc. Broadcasting, nel Chan- ofClear adivision Network, Traffic A. Total herein. contained conditions and terms the of breach material in is End-User thatthe event in the Data Traffic the shall no An End-User the to longer have right use apply: conditions and terms additional following the information. If hasthis capability system your have the capability to display real-time traffic with navigation equipped models MINI Certain The symbol in the toolbar of the map view view ofthemap in thetoolbar symbol The 123
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Destination guidance 3. 2. 1. tions may not apply toyou. notapply may tions quential damages, so those particular limita- conse- or incidental of limitation or exclusion the not allow do states liability).strict Some and liability product asnegligence, tort (such and in contract claims limitation, without including, toall claims, apply These limitations damages. ofthepossibility of such areaware NA MINI Inc.,Inrix, Network, or if Total even Traffic and data, touseofthetraffic orindirectly directly to the same) arising from any claim relating relating or profits revenues, anticipated enues, rev- lost limitation, without (including, damages incidental or exemplary, consequential, special, MINI NAwill be liable to you for any indirect, Network, Inc.Inrix, nor Traffic Total D. Neither usage of trade. or of dealing fromacourse or arising pose, those pur- a for particular fitness non-infringement merchantability, of theimplied warranties tion, limita- without including, statutory, or implied express, accurate), will be data thetraffic that or interruption error-free, without operate will be will material licensed thatthe limitation, out with- (including, to thelicensed material respect with orrepresentations warranties all law, by ted permit- extent fullest the to disclaims, expressly material, ofthelicensed any providers of party all third and any to, limited not but including, Network, Traffic Total is". "where and is," "as C. licensedThe material is provided to license conditions, orspeed. routeusability, road and traffic content, about norepresentations make TrafficNetwork, MINI NA, and theirsuppliers only.tional all risk Userassumes of Total use. Network Traffic Total B. 124 page to refer principles operating for computer, On-board on/off information oftraffic reception Switching Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info". Traffic "Receive Activate/deactivate Open "Options". "Navigation" 16 . traffic data isinforma- data traffic 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. traffic Accessing information along the planned route. The colors displayed displayed colors The route. planned the along depicted bytrafficsymbols inthe map or by bars are obstruction atraffic of and effects tion, direc- length, the scale, map the on Depending display Additional information in the map route. the to in relation obstruction traffic of the location and of onthescale map the depending differently, displayed ofare symbols traffic obstructions The view map in Symbols 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. displayed. arenolonger destinations cial spe- the for symbols The inthis setting. garded disre- is mode day/night The information. traffic of depiction optimized an permits This scale. gray- to a is switched Display Control the on ture ma info thetraffic When Traffic inthebulletins map tion ifdesired. tion informa- traffic tothenextor Scroll previous information. information. traffic Select tion. thecurrent distance posi- vehicle from their of order the in sorted are bulletins traffic The displayed. are route planned the to relating bulletins traffic First, the calculatedroute. to relate information traffic when red turns area is here. listed rounding symbol The sur- the for information traffic Info": "Traffic "Map" "Navigation" "Traffic conditions/gray map" conditions/gray "Traffic "Settings" Open "Options". "Map" "Navigation" "Traffic Info" Info" "Traffic "More information": display additional additional display information": "More p is activated, thepic- is activated, p information during route guidance. routeguidance. A message during is information traffic existing the account into takes system The active. is guidance route semi-dynamic on, switched reception information traffic With routeSemi-dynamic guidance with guidance Route traffic information > > displayed. are categories selected the of bulletins Traffic 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. display: should system the bulletins traffic which set To bulletins oftraffic Filtering service. traffic information the sent by information the on depend displayed colors The > > > > > service. information dependon the information sent bythetraffic tial hazard such as a wrong-way driver. asawrong-way such hazard tial apoten- announce bulletins that traffic hide to isnotpossible it safety, personal your For are always displayed. the route along onincidents bulletins Traffic categories. desired the Select categories" Info "Traffic Open "Options". "Map" "Navigation" construction road suchas information traffic general Gray: roads clear Green: traffic heavy Yellow: traffic stop-and-go Orange: Red: traffic congestion 3. 2. 1. guidance: route dynamic activate To > > > > obstructions. traffic of event the in changed automatically is route The guidance destination Dynamic 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. via the list: also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed can routes alternate take to possible is also It route. alternate possible is displayed way,a amessage without ontheroad- objects particulare.g. hazards, With Taking an alternate route: routeare displayed. also nate alter- the and route original the between time distance and in difference The route. alternate an suggests obstruction, ofa traffic theevent in and information displays thetraffic message The routes. alternate thepossible and information, thetraffic theroute, of asafunction displayed "Detour" "Dynamic guidance" "Dynamic Open "Options". "Navigation" setting. the of aredisplayed regardless hazards Certain obstruction. traffic the through travel the route can also be calculatedso that you obstruction, ofthetraffic length and nature Depending on the type of road and the onthemap. played will dis- to be continue information Traffic route. ontheoriginal tions obstruc- outtraffic notpoint will system The "Detour information" "Detour "Map" "Navigation" "Detour" Info" "Traffic 125
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE What to do if… > > > > > > > What to do if… doif… What to 126 again operational. thesystemis before once 10minutes about ittakes wasdisconnected, thebattery If entries? react to does not system navigation The suggestion. route late a new tocalcu- seconds afew the system requires and route left therecommended have you or yet, recorded fully hasnot been area The guidance? destination during intersections before issued nolonger instructions Voice are depiction of traffic information. anoptimized Thispermits a grayscale. to switched is Display Control onthe picture When the traffic info map is activated, the The map view is displayed in grayscale? close as possible to theoriginal. as is that destination a Select destination. ofthe data the notcontain do data Stored selected during destination entry? be cannot letters destination for The a as close as possible to theoriginal. is that adestination Select data. navigation the in contained not is data destination The destination? The destination guidance does not accept a guidance. destination and start streetintown/city theselected any Input entered. thathasbeen or city town the for determined be areacannot downtown A thestreetname? without an address notaccept does guidance destination The tothesky. view unobstructed an have you when best is tion Recep- position. the of determining process is in orthesystem area, the reception a poor in region, unrecognized an in is position The The current position cannot be displayed? 127
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
ENTERTAINMENT
Communication
MOBILITY
REFERENCE On/off and tone 6 5 4 > > > options: settings and trols con- shared sources following have audio The On/off andtone 130 3 2 1 player CD the near Buttons > > > using: operated can be sources audio The Controls Selecting waveband Selecting source audio the Changing > > volume on/off, entertainment for output Sound External devices, e.g. MP3 player devices, e.g.MP3 External CD player Radio > > search scan/track Station Eject CD Drive for audioCDs page to wheel, refer onthesteering Buttons On-board computer player CD nearthe Buttons Turn: adjust volume. adjust Turn: played. setmost ortrack isrecently station onthe unit,radio the switch you When Press: switch on/off. Selecting a track for the CD player. CD the for atrack Selecting station. radio Change 11 switched off. switched is output thesound Display indicates that thebutton. Press Entertainment audio output Switching on/off wheel, refer to page to refer wheel, steering the on adjusted be also can volume The volume. desired the to theknob Turn Adjusting volume rently in use, refer to Personal in page use,refer toPersonal rently Profile, control cur- remote is stored for the setting The symboloftheControl This edge theupper at 11 . 26 . 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Adjustments > > fader balance, bass, Treble, page Profile,currently in refertoPersonal use, remotecontrol stored settings for the are The once. at sources audio all for set are settings tone The trol. con- volume speed-dependent the or bass and e.g.treble be changed, can tonesettings Various Tone control osoe rs h IIjoystick. MINI the press store: To joystick. MINI the turn adjust: To setting. tone desired the Select "Tone" or"Settings". "Radio" "CD/Multimedia", front/rear fader "Fader": "Balance": balanceright/left 26 . > > > 4. 3. 2. 1. Adjustments > > levels Volume 6. 5. 3. 2. 1. value. tothedefault be reset can settings tone All Resetting tone settings a phone conversation. a phone during speaker the of volume "Loudspeak.": duringa phone conversation. microphone of the volume "Microphone": output sound entertainment the to relative warning belt seat acoustic the for e.g. signal, oftheacoustic volume "Gong": output sound totheentertainment relative Select the desired volume setting. volume desired the Select settings" "Volume "Tone" or"Settings". "Radio" "CD/Multimedia", "PDC" onthespeed depending adapted is volume volume": "Speed osoe rs h IIjoystick. MINI the press store: To joystick. To adjust: turnMINI the "Reset" "Tone" or"Settings". "Radio" "CD/Multimedia", * : volume of the PDC acoustic signal acoustic ofthe PDC : volume 131
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Radio > > > stations: lowing fol- the of reception for designed is radio Your Radio 132 1. off. switched is output sound the if button the Press aSelecting station AM/FM station 2. Satellite radio Satellite Radio HD FM and AM "Radio" "FM" or"AM" "FM" * * page to refer wheel, steering the on buttons the Press or direction or joystick Turn and press the MINI Changing stations IIjoystick. MINI hold press the storethestation: and To 4. 3. 2. 1. thefrequency. via selection Station manually a station Selecting control currently incontrol use. isremote stored station for the selected The 3. eettefeuny unteMN joystick. theMINI turn frequency: Select the "Manual" or"AM" "FM" "Radio" Select desired station. Select the 11 Press the button for the corresponding forthecorresponding thebutton Press . rently inrently use. cur- control remote the for stored is setting The 4. 3. 2. 1. Switching RDS on/off aredisplayed. station names the before time some take itcan or disrupted, weak is reception the If Display. Control the on names are shown station aregood, the ditions con- reception If RDS. the via istransmitted tion informa- additional range, theFM frequency In Radio Data System RDS* currently in use. theremote control arestored for stations The 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Using the on-board computer Storing stations "RDS" Open "Options". "FM" "Radio" location. memory desired the Select joystick. MINI the hold and Press station. desired the Select "FM" or "AM" "Radio" etc. HD3, HD2, in end substations the of names tion HD1. ends sta- The in station ofthe main name broadcasts additional substations. The station case, switch off digital radio reception. In this output. inthe interruptions or repetitions to lead can broadcasts two these between shift between analog and digitalreception. Any time received in digital mode, playback switches continuously is not thestation in which areas In digitally. received being inrently use. cur- control remote the for stored is setting The 4. 3. 2. 1. reception Activating/deactivating radio digital Corp. Digital uity ofiBiq- trademarks proprietary are logos Radio Digital Corp. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD iBiquity from licensed Patents and U.S. Foreign under is manufactured technology Radio™ HD conditions License quality. sound improved with thus and digitally received be can stations these signals. network adigitalis If radio available, digital and analog transmit stations radio Many reception* HD Radio™ Selecting a substation 3. 2. 1. ist. art- the of name as the such track, current the on information additional broadcast stations Some Displaying additionalinformation This symbol indicates that a main station also also station main a that indicates symbol This This symbol is displayed when a station is is station a when displayed is symbol This "HD Radio Reception" Open "Options". "FM" or "AM" "Radio" "Station info" "Station Open "Options". station. desired the Select 133
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Radio Stored stations Stored station. main the to back switches theradio period, anextended for If seconds. for is reception several interrupted ismuted the is substation poor, reception When 3. 2. 1. 134 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Deleting astation 3. 2. 1. is selected currently station stored. The Storingstation a 3. 2. 1. aSelecting station stations. isIt tostoreup possible to 40 control currently incontrol use. remote the for stored is stations of stored list The 4. Select the substation. the Select joystick. MINI the Press desired station. Select the "Delete entry" "Delete Open "Options". desired station. Select the "Presets" "Radio" "Store station" "Presets" "Radio" desired station. Select the "Presets" "Radio" Select desiredSelect location. memory the Managing subscription Managing Navigation bar Packages must be activated by telephone. packages. in fixed offered channels are The information General radio* Satellite 3. 2. 1. arenotactivated. that channels all includes Channels Unsubscribed category The Activating channels is line. displayed in name status the channel to sky. the The view anunobstructed have you deactivating channels. Reception is best when and foractivating is required reception Clear Symbol "Satellite radio" "Radio" Accessing favorites, selecting "Category" Traffic Jump Traffic favorites Managing category Favorites the My shift Time directlyEntering channel category Selecting view list Changing Function control currently incontrol use. fortheremote selected is stored channel The channels. activated to listen only can You channels Selecting 5. displayed. are ESN, number, serial number electronic and telephone The 4. 3. 2. 1. Deactivating channels more. once thechannels deactivate can used number to also be telephone This 6. 5. 4. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels. the deactivate to Sirius Call subscription" "Manage Open "Options". radio" "Satellite "Radio" activated. channels the tohave number thetelephone Dial displayed. are ESN, number, serial electronic and number telephone The channel. desired Select Channels. Unsubscribed category the Select The next channel is nextchannel The selected. direction. Using the buttons near theCD player 4. 3. 2. 1. Using the on-board computer 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. channel Storing 4. 3. 2. 1. Using direct entry channel Select desired channel. desired Select gory. cate- desired the or channels" "All Select radio" "Satellite "Radio" Press again. Press channel. desired Select category. desired a or channels" "All Select radio" "Satellite "Radio" stick. desired channeland then pressthe MINI joy- reach the you until joystick MINI the Turn radio" "Satellite "Radio" Press the button for the corresponding forthecorresponding thebutton Press "Set channel" "Set 135
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Radio 6. 136 selected. is channel new is memory if Thecache over. deleted a recorded is memory full, are thentheolder cache tracks If the thelivebroadcast. time from different The stored audio track can be played back at a available. be must signal the Prerequisite: memory. cache a in stored temporarily is to listened being rently channel cur- of onehour the Approximately shiftTime 4. 3. 2. 1. category Selecting is thechannel displayed. about Information on the navigation bar is pressed. time the first list each symbol The changes view Changing list view use. in currently remotecontrol stored for channels are the The 7. Symbol highlighted channel. highlighted the confirm to again joystick MINI Press the Select desired category. Select the "Satellite radio" "Radio" desiredSelect location. memory the "Category" Track Artist name Channel Function > > > 3. 2. 1. TimeAccessing shift delay. The audio playback then continues with a time > > > of: intheevent automatically stopped is playback audio isactivated, thefunction When Automatic time shift menu shift Time Symbol For liveFor "live". transmissions: is displayed next to the cache memory bar. livebroadcast the from time difference The position. playback thecurrent indicates red arrow The "Satellite radio" "Radio" Muting. system. activation voice the of Activation calls. telephone outgoing and Incoming "Replay - Time shift" vated/activated deacti- shift time Automatic Reverse forward Fast track Previous Next track Playback/pause broadcast live to Go Function 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. aselection from list. tothefavorites added be can or teams Leagues Storing league or team 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. available. be must information channel The ites. as can favor- current stored Only be broadcasts Storing artist, track, or game team. and league, track, include game, artist, list. Possible favorites in thefavorites stored be can favorites to30 Up Storing favorites Deactivating 4. 3. 2. 1. Activating "Automatic time shift" time "Automatic Select the desired league. desired the Select "Add sportsinformation" radio" "Satellite "Radio" Select track,artist, or game. again. joystick MINI the Press channel. desired Select gory. cate- desired the or channels" "All Select radio" "Satellite "Radio" radio" "Satellite "Radio" "ReplayTime - shift" "Automatic time shift" time "Automatic "Manage favorites" "Manage from a list. a from selected be can broadcast being currently ites of favor- the All category. Favorites theMy into switches system the nonotification, itIf receives played. be will favorite displayed The is alertmessage while the "Favorites" being displayed. Select seconds. 20 forapprox. appears alert!" "Favorite sage mes- the played, being is favorite activated an If Accessing favorites 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Deleting favorites inrently use. cur- control remote the for stored is setting The 3. 2. 1. bally and individually. glo- ordeactivated beactivated can Favorites Activating/deactivating favorites Managing favorites 6. "Delete entry" "Delete Open "Options". wishtodelete. you favorites the Highlight radio" "Satellite favorites. or desired alert" "Activate Select radio" "Satellite Select "Add or desiredSelect team. teams" all "Add a "Manage favorites" "Manage favorites" "Manage 137
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Radio rently inrently use. cur- control remote the for stored is region The 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. region Selecting utes. min- ofafew atintervals broadcast are region foraselected information weather and Traffic Jump Traffic 138 eral minutes. update occurs automatically and can take sev- The thechannels. positions of and thenames of outan update Siriuscarries a year, twice About Automatic update Jump. Traffic todeactivate oneofthesymbols Select "Cancel". Jump: Traffic Cancel in thedisplay. appears panel A new broadcast. itis available, becomes region Assoon as information about theselected 3. 2. 1. Activating/deactivating Jump Symbol Select desiredSelect region. the "Set jump" Open "Options". "Satellite radio" "Radio" "Satellite radio" "Radio" "Jump to:" broadcast. is being currently Information soon. broadcast be will Information Meaning > > Notes interference. sources or of powerful tains, radio other trees, or near moun- garages underground or in tunnels be available signal not may The this. on hasnoinfluence ellite radio sat- The conditions. ortopographical mental e.g. possible, certain environ- not be under may reception circumstances, some Under track. desired the reach you until repeatedly direction 2. 1. Audio CDs computer theSelecting track usingthe on-board Selecting the track using the button playback Audio drive. ontheCD player. the button from out shortdistance slid a be will CD The Press the Eject CD > > CD player Playable formats structure. folder the on depending thedata, to minutes several take can files, audio it CDs with is on.For compressed put out- sound ifthe automatically starts Playback in. pulled automatically is CD Die up. side thelabeled with drive the into theCD Insert Inserting CD information General CD player "CD" "CD/Multimedia" files: audio Compressed WMA,AAC MP3, CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA Press the button for the corresponding forthecorresponding thebutton Press * * 3. 2. 1. displayed. correctly be will theCD on indications all not that possible is it data, the on Depending files* audio compressed with CDs 4. 3. the MINI joystick toward theleft. toward joystick MINI the move directory: level toahigher change To necessary. if directory, the Select "CD" "CD/Multimedia" Select a track and press the MINI joystick. presstheMINI and a track Select MINI joystick to start playback. start to joystick MINI Press track. the Select desired the 139
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE CD player > > > > automatically: displayed is it stored, been has track a about information If Displaying information abouttrack* the 140 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. eachin random order. The tracks on the current CD are played once Random play sequence source is changed or the ignition is switched off. switched is ignition the or changed is source is the off mode switched audioRandom when sequence. random in back played are therein contained thetracks and directories the files: audio compressed CDs with Track file name on the CD oftracks Number titleAlbum Artist "Random" Open "Options". desiredSelect CD. the "CD" "CD/Multimedia" sponding direction. repeated. automatically are folders,or CDs tracks, Selected Automatic replay* forward/reverse Fast Press and hold the button for the forthe corre- thebutton and hold Press of the device to the AUX-IN port AUX-IN the to device the of orline-out connection theheadphone connect vehicle speakers, over the playback audio For 2 1 Connecting > > Overview connection AUX-IN Overview External devices Symbol R onco /"35mm 1/8"/3.5 connector TRS playback: audio for Connection USB interface files. audio of the quality the on depend may Tone device. audio the on settings volume and tone settings: mid-level Recommended speakers. cle thevehi- players. Sound over is MP3 output It is possible to connectaudio devices, e.g. Bluetooth audio Bluetooth interface audio phone Mobile USB audio interface AUX-IN connection Meaning * * 2 . * 2. 1. Sound is output on the loudspeakers. onthe vehicle is output Sound 3. refer to page to refer principles for operating computer, On-board on. switched be must device audio The Starting audio playback 4. 3. 2. 1. Adjusting volume volumes. the adjust to advisable it sources, of theotheraudio volume the from is markedly differs volume this If device. audio the on depends output sound the of volume The Volume 5. or "External devices" if applicable "CD/Multimedia" "Volume" or "External devices" if applicable "CD/Multimedia" sstadpesteMN joystick. pressMINI the is setand volume desired the until joystick MINI Turn "AUX front" "AUX "AUX front" "AUX 16 . 141
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE External devices mobile phones. devices/ audio forsuitable Ask your center MINI device/mobile phone. audio forevery guaranteed be cannot vehicle the via operation an onthemarket, available Because of the large number of audio devices puter. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers. thevehicle Sound over is output puter. com- on-board the using operated are They devices. external audio is toconnect possible It Overview interface* audio phone mobile USB audio interface*/ 142 > > ble Apple device is possible: compati- a with files video standard of Playback Video files* > > > > > > possible: is files audio standard of Playback Audio files > > Options for connecting external devices audio interface. USB the in present is plug no if possible only is Playback phones. mobile or iPhone music player in the mobile phone:Apple ofthe connectivity extended with equipped H.264 MPEG4 M3U, WPL lists: system:playback activation voice With lists: M3U playback system: activation voice Without AAC WAV (PCM) WMA MP3 adapter snap-in the via Connection interface. audio USB the by supported are USB memory sticks, or mobile that phones USBdevices asMP3 devices, players, such Connection via USB audiointerface: Apple * , M4A * * , PLS * * , when , when structure of the Apple device. Apple the of structure themenu supports interface USBaudio The a USB interface. interfaceor using aflexible adapter cable adapter cablewith AV-in connection and USB thespecial device using theApple connect speakers, thevehicle over playback audio For www.mini.com/connectivity. ordirect to: center MINI yourInternet browser your please contact information, further For connection. foraproper required is cable Theadapter theApple device. necting A special adapter cable adapter special A Apple device 2 1 viaConnect the audio interface.USB via the file directory. accessed be can tracks the transmission, During oftracks. number the on and device onthe USB is dependent time required The time. some take can process vehicle. This the into are playliststhe oftheUSB imported device and style or music artist e.g. information, Track After initial connection interface totheUSB device theUSB Connect cable. adapter flexible from mechanical damage, connect them with a device USB and interface the USB protect To device USB R onco /"35mm connector 1/8"/3.5 TRS playback: audio for Connection USB interface * is availablefor con- * with with 1 . 4. 3. 2. 1. Starting the track search stored in the Latin alphabet. have been titles they aredisplayed if Track > > > isSelection via: possible search Track track. first the with begins Playback 3. 2. 1. Starting audio playback Audio playback be played. cannot (DRM) agement Man- Rights Digital withintegrated tracks Music Copy protection ing tracks may be deleted. of exist- stored,26,000 tracks data the then are than more if or connected is device fifth a If cle. the vehi- in stored be can tracks 26,000 approx. data to fromThe four up or USBdevices for Number of tracks "Artist". symbol. "Genre", e.g. category, desired Select or the Select devices" "External "CD/Multimedia" composer. directory, file devices: USB for Additionally track. style, album, artist, Information: music Playback lists press symbol the and joystick. MINI or Select the devices" "External "CD/Multimedia" 4. 3. 2. 1. ofList tracks currently being played. Current playback 4. 3. 2. 1. lists. playback open To Playback lists "New search" Restarting a track search 6. 5. eette r symbol. playback" "Current or the Select devices" "External "CD/Multimedia" symbol. "Playlists" or the Select devices" "External "CD/Multimedia" "Start play" "Start played. arethendis- thatartist by tracks ofthe All artist only. upthat call displayed, be to are artist if acertain by example, ofthetracks all For tobe selected. need allNot categories desired. if categories additional Select > > All displayed entries are in a list. Select the desired entry from list. Select from the thedesired entry displayed. are that sequence all thatcontain results first areentered, letters letter.If multiple as the letter this using filtered are results is aletter the entered, When input. enterthedesired and "A-Zsearch" Open 143
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE External devices 4. 3. 2. 1. 5. Fast forward/reverse Fast 4. 3. 2. 1. sequence. current list isThe oftracks in random played Random play sequence 144 cable adapter thevideo-enabled using For video playback, connect the Apple device is stopped. Video function is only available when the vehicle playback* Video sponding direction. player: orCD wheel onthesteering Buttons "Video" stick. joy- theMINI and symbol press Select the "External devices" "CD/Multimedia" Select category in file directory,ifapplicable. file. desired Select "Random" Open "Options". "External devices" "CD/Multimedia" Press and hold the button for the corre- forthe thebutton and hold Press * . proper playback cannot always be ensured. be always cannot playback proper Kbit/s, 256 files, e.g.bit greater than rates audio ofthe configuration the on Depending ing safety while driving. driv- impairing damaged, be may device audio the device. Otherwise theaudio of manual ating oper- refer to the temperatures, high extremely > > > > > onconnection Information Notes > > > > Overview audio* Bluetooth 12/2010. starting expected is cable adapter enabled Availability of this function and the video- 6. recharge external devices. external recharge to interface audio USB notusethe Do drives. hard USB connect not Do interface. audio USB the to lamps, e.g. notconnect devices, any or Do fans interface. theUSB into tor theconnec- plugging force when not use Do vehicle. the in socket power the to thedevice notconnect do Therefore, device. the by if supported mA of500 power a max. The connected audio device is supplied with with the vehicle. the with bepaired can devices tofourexternal Up device. onthe setting volume the change necessary, If device. the on depends output sound of the volume The vehicle speakers. over the is output Sound devices or mobile phones. audio e.g. devices, external from files It toplay useBluetooth music is possible to started. is file video selected ofthe playback The joystick. MINI the Press extreme environmental conditions, e.g. conditions, environmental extreme Do not subject the audio device to < 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. users. road orother ofpassengers to endangerment > > Pairing and connecting and Pairing > > > > Requirements the device's display. device's the on vehicle the of name Bluetooth the Select display. device's on the appears ofthevehicle name Bluetooth The device. or anew device Bluetooth connect and for e.g. search device: the for manual owner's the to refer device, the on operations other perform To played. is dis- ofthevehicle name Bluetooth The "Add newphone" applicable if audio" or "Bluetooth (audio)" "Bluetooth "CD/Multimedia" passkey. Only required once forpairing. required once Only passkey. astheBluetooth its established has been 16 dig- most at and 4 least at with A number device. the for manual owner's to refer orvisible, notconfirmed e.g. connection arerequired, thedevice presets in Bluetooth page referto in vehicle, activated Bluetooth Ignition switched on. Device operational. www.mini.com/connectivity. at is available Information device. Suitable < stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead lead may inattention otherwise, stopped; is thevehicle when the device Only pair 153 , and in the device. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. devices. the list of device from paired desired the of connection theaudio activate necessary, If Prerequisite Bluetooth. via connected is that phone mobile a via place taking currently is exchange ifadata possible is not Connection connected asactive an audio source. be can paired been already has that device A device particular a Connecting 7. refer to page to refer if…, do to what not successful: was the pairing If an audiosource. asconnected. played successful, the If is dis- was the device pairing 9. 8. symbol displayed in white: device is active as "OK" Activate "Audio". phone" "Configure Open "Options". paired devices. thelist device ofSelect from the desired applicable if audio" or "Bluetooth (audio)" "Bluetooth "CD/Multimedia" Enter the passkey and confirm. and thepasskey Enter passkey. Bluetooth thesame to enter you prompt will device the or computer on-board The "OK" device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio". the which functions with Select desired 147 . 145
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE External devices an audio source. 4. 3. 2. 1. device a Connecting 146 4. 3. 2. 1. Starting playback > > > information General Playback 5. symbol displayed in white: device is active as as active is device white: indisplayed symbol paired devices. from desiredSelect thelist device ofthe ifapplicable audio" or "Bluetooth (audio)" "Bluetooth "CD/Multimedia" eette symbol. the Select "External devices" "CD/Multimedia" device. Connect via Bluetooth. nected that is con- phone amobile via place takes exchange data a if interrupted is Playback possible. areboth computer ortheon-board thedevice via Operation device. the The displayof track information depends on Select the desired title from the desiredlist.the titleSelect from the 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. by track. search to possible itis device, the on Depending search* Track available. be not may functions all device, the on Depending Playback menu* 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. connection audio an Disconnecting 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. files. forplaying music programs various be theremay thedevice, on Depending Player program* Symbol Select desired entry or directory. "A-Z search" content" device "Search symbol. the Select "External devices" "CD/Multimedia" Deactivate "Audio". Deactivate phone" "Configure Open "Options". devices. nected Select the desired device from the listofcon- (audio)" "Bluetooth "CD/Multimedia" program. desired the Select player". "Select Open "Options". symbol. the Select "External devices" "CD/Multimedia" symbol. the hold and press Reverse: Previous track symbol. press hold forward: and Fast the Next track Function > > refertopage phones, mobile Suitable www.mini.com/connectivity. at available is devices suitable about Information What to if… do 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Unpair device active. is All disconnected. remain otherconnections connection only theaudio phone, a With mobile 7. charging cable. charging mobilephone in the snap-in adapterorvia a of amount the Charge remaining? charge battery small a have only it does or mode economy in power phone Ismobile the devices. other with theconnections delete necessary, If vehicle? the orto device to the devices connected Bluetooth Are toomany procedure. thepairing Repeat seconds? 30 than taking longer input Ispasskey the puter. com- theon-board via and device on the passkey same the Enter match? vehicle and onthedevice passkeys theBluetooth Do connected. or paired be not could Device refer to page to refer If necessary, perform a software update asoftware If perform necessary, vehicle. by notsupported Device fromlist" phone "Remove Open "Options". unpaired. tobe device the Highlight applicable if audio" or "Bluetooth (audio)" "Bluetooth "CD/Multimedia" "OK" 148 . 152 . * , contact the Hotline or center. MINI theHotline your or contact please function thedesired activate still cannot in thelist items all and gone through have you If > > > > > > and start playback again. startplayback and the audio connection, refer to page to refer connection, audio the e.g. connections, two ofthe one Disconnect phone in themobile player ofthemusic tivity connec- extended the via time same the at and audio Bluetooth via is connected phone Playback is not possible when the mobile panel. control radio the on mute radio the deactivate and Activate continue. notautomatically does and report traffic Playback is interrupted by a phone call or onthedevice. nal Switch off sig- other acoustic key tonesand device. the on messages other or ton Playbackisinterrupted by the press of abut- is available www.mini.com/connectivity. at Information compatibility. the device Check playedwith adelayed audiooutput. Videos cannot be played or can only be onthe device. volume settings Adjust Music files only play quietly. panel. control radio the on mute radio the deactivate and Activate device. the via atrack select ifnecessary, and device the music for playing program files Start on the No music can be played. procedure. thepairing Repeat the device off and back on again. Switch nolonger responding? Is the device device. pair only one connect and and the vehicle from device theconnected Unpair vehicle. tothe device one toconnect possible be Depending on the mobile phone, it may only * . 146 147 ,
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE External devices www.mini.com/connectivity. page theweb on areavailable instructions up-to-date associated, and update Software forexample. devices, support new mobile phones or new external to the vehicle can enable update A software using. currently is it software the on depending devices, external various supports vehicle The update* Software 148 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. when stopped. The software update can only be performed Updating software 3. 2. 1. currently installed isThe software displayed. version current Displaying All of the listed software updates areinstalled. All listed updates of software the 7. 6. "Update software" update" "Software "Settings" compartment. glove the in interface theUSB using update the form toper- possible is It not console. center the in interface audio oftheUSB interface USB tothe device storage data theUSB Connect device. storage USB data a of directory main inthe update software forthe thefile Save version" current "Show update" "Software "Settings" "OK" update" "Start software version. software tothedisplay ofapplies thecurrently installed also This more. once available are functions the until previous version. minutes afew Wait the to or while update restoring software a during unavailable be temporarily devices may nected IIConnected MINI Note areremoved. listedAll updates software of the 4. 3. 2. 1. performed when stopped. be can only version theprevious restoring to The update. tothelastsoftware prior version thesoftware to necessary,If it system is possible to restore the Restoring version a previous "OK" version" previous "Restore update" "Software "Settings" * , Office functions, and con- and functions, Office , 149
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communication
Communication
MOBILITY
REFERENCE Telephone vehicle occupants and other road road users. other and occupants vehicle endanger can distracted being your precaution, dothis you not observe If system instead. free hands- aredriving; while you the use hand your provider. phone themobile by activated maybeIt for necessary somefunctions beto refertopage functions, of audio ation phone functions will be described below. Oper- vehicle.tele- The via bethe used can devices external source, asanaudio and/or telephone a as functioning are they on whether Depending keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur. may malfunctions otherwise, keypad; phone the mobile via notbe operated should tothevehicle is connected that phone A mobile > > > possible to: voice by wheel, and onthesteering thebuttons puter, cle and can be controlled via the on-boardcom- in vehi- the arepresent soonasthey as detected areautomatically on,thesedevices switched is ignition the when once, paired being After Bluetooth. via tothevehicle connected players, be can audio Mobile phones orother externaldevices, e.g. The concept Overview Telephone 152 to page refer adapter, snap-in The Snap-in adapter* and constant quality. sound constant and connection network assuresabetter This vehicle. ofthe antenna external ittoan Connect battery. its Recharge phone. themobile Accommodate * permit. in nothold phone Do the mobile conditions traffic when entries make Only . * 163 , makes it it , makes 144 < . refer to page to refer It is possible to perform a software update asoftware toperform possible is It occur. may malfunctions versions, orsoftware phones othermobile With described below. functions vehicle the support phones mobile suitable version, these acertain software With 4. 3. 2. 1. phone mayalsorequired.be number.The software versionof the mobile part software and number identification vehicle the requires preparation phone mobile the by aresupported phones mobile which Checking number part software and number identification vehicle Displaying www.mini.com/connectivity. mobile phone preparation, go to thecomplete by aresupported interface tooth aBlue- with be can devices external and phones mobile which about information precise For phones mobile Suitable > > > > areavailable: functions following The Overview phone mobile Pairing/unpairing "Display system information" system "Display info" "Bluetooth Open "Options". "Telephone" refer to page to refer Using an audio device as an audio source, source. asanaudio phone themobile Using phone*. asanauxiliary phone themobile Using asatelephone. phone themobile Using 148 . 144 . * , > > > > > > play. Dis- Control the in shown be can phone auxiliary > Requirements topage refer accepted, be can phone totheauxiliary calls Incoming Auxiliary phone* functions. phone following all of the toperform used be can phone The functions. fordifferent used and time at a vehicle to the be connected can devices be Three paired. can devices external tofour Up inactive. symbol: function Gray active. symbol: function White pairing. the during symbols as displayed are device audio and phone mobile the by supported Functions Symbol Ignition switched on. forpairing. required once Only passkey. astheBluetooth its established has been 16 dig- most at and 4 least at with A number page to refer tion, connec- theaudio deactivate If necessary, mobile phone. forthe manual refertoowner's visible, or notconfirmed required, e.g. connection are mobile presetsphone in Bluetooth the page referto in vehicle, activated Bluetooth operational. phone Mobile Suitable mobile phone, topage phone, mobile refer Suitable 153 Audio source Audio Auxiliary phone Telephone Function , and in the mobile phone. 153 157 . . missed calls to the to calls . missed 152 . 3. 2. 1. page to refer function, this support that phones mobile onsuitable For before information pairing. them activate vehicle, the in functions these use To functions Activating/deactivating additional 3. 2. 1. and regulations. allguidelines with safety Comply everywhere. permitted is not Bluetooth link Bluetooth Activating/deactivating "Additional telephone" "Additional phone. iary Another mobile phone can be used as an auxil- Auxiliary phone* "Office" thevehicle. into phone themobile from imported are emails and sages, textmes- notes, tasks, appointments, Contacts, Office and reconnect the mobile phone. thefunction deactivate vehicle, the in phone tele- a as exclusively phone mobile the use To audio" "Bluetooth vehicle. the in device audio Use amobilephone asa telephone andas an audio Bluetooth Open "Options". (telephone)" "Bluetooth "Telephone" "Bluetooth" Open "Options". "Telephone" 152 . 153
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Telephone 3. 2. 1. users. road other or ofpassengers toendangerment lead may 6. 5. 4. Pairing and connecting 154 played. is dis- ofthevehicle name Bluetooth The phone" new "Add (telephone)" "Bluetooth "Telephone" Enter the passkey confirm. and thepasskey Enter passkey. Bluetooth toenterthe same you prompt will phone or mobile the computer on-board The the mobile phone display. on vehicle the of name Bluetooth the Select display. phone mobile the on appears ofthevehicle name Bluetooth The device. new a or device Bluetooth connect and for search e.g. phone: mobile forthe manual refertothe owner's phone, To perform other operations on the mobile vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention otherwise, inattention is stopped; vehicle Only whenthe pair phone themobile < > > > the initial Following pairing 2. 1. be connected by selecting it. can Adifferentlist phone mobile is connected. ofthe top atthe phone mobile the vehicle, the If more than one mobile phone is detected by phone mobile particular a Connecting refer to page to refer if…, do to what notsuccessful: was pairing the If phones. mobile of list the of top the at appears If pairing successful, was the phone mobile 8. 7. phone operating instructions. operating phone tothemobile connection, refer secure a or authorization e.g. phones, mobile Specific necessary settings be may in some telephone. card SIM and/or phone themobile from imported are entries book phone After identification, on. switched is ignition the or running is engine the when oftime period a short within vehicle the The mobile phone is detected/connectedin All pairedmobile phones are listed. (telephone)" "Bluetooth "Telephone" "OK" phone. mobile the for used tobe are that options thedevice Select * of the telephone, depending on the on depending ofthetelephone, 156 . 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. device Configuring ordeactivated. activated be can connected and paired are that devices in options Device options Device ifnecessary. deactivated are thesefunctions then connected, is already phonewhen it is reconnected. If amobile phone tothemobile assigned are phone mobile the of theunpairing before functions assigned The 3. "OK" > > > must be selected. one function least At functions. Activating/deactivating phone" "Configure Open "Options". configured. tobe device the Highlight (telephone)" "Bluetooth "Telephone" connected. be to phone mobile the Select "Audio" telephone" "Additional "Telephone" 2. 1. source: audio asan connected already is adevice If source. audio an as connected is device other no if source asanaudio is used phone mobile The cle, refertopage in phone vehi- mobile connecting and Activating page to refer audio, Bluetooth Activate source. audio Using the audio-capable mobile phone as an source Using the mobile phone as an audio 3. 2. 1. swapped between the two devices. be can function tothevehicle, the nected are con- auxiliary phone and thetelephone If phone Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary 4. 3. 2. 1. device Unpairing unpaired. device and cause the other device to be connected already an in function the tivate deac- may this afunction, isassigned adevice If longer connected to the vehicle. the to connected longer is previous no source audio source. The audio an as connected is phone mobile The foraudio" "Use vehicle, refertopage vehicle, in phone mobile connecting and Activating "Swap phone/addit. phone" (telephone)" "Bluetooth "Telephone" Open "Options". Highlight the device to be unpaired. All paired mobile phones are listed. (telephone)" "Bluetooth "Telephone" 153 . 154 . 154 . 155
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Telephone > > 5. 156 page to refer suitable phones, mobile on information For to What if… do > > > > > > nected. Themobile phone couldnot be paired or con- again. Repeat the pairing procedure. thepairing again. Repeat Switch the mobile phone off and back on responding? longer no phone mobile the Is device. the vehicleandonly pair andconnect one vehicle. Unpairthe connected devicefrom tothe device one toconnect possible be only it may phone, mobile the on Depending a chargingcable. "Remove phone from list" from phone "Remove mobile phone in the snap-in adapter of amount the Charge remaining? charge battery small a have only it does or mode economy power in phone mobile the Is connection. theaudio vate Deacti- activated? connection audio the Is phone. onthemobile other devices nections with con- the delete so, If phone? mobile the to connected devices Bluetooth Are too many procedure. thepairing seconds? Repeat than30 taking longer input Is passkey the computer. on-board the via passkey and phone same onthemobile Enter the match? thevehicle and phone onthemobile passkeys theBluetooth Do phone. mobile the in and vehicle the in Bluetooth Activate phone? mobile the and in thevehicle in activated Is Bluetooth 152 . * or via > > is quality low. connection telephone The > > > > contact the Hotline or your MINI center. or MINI your theHotline contact please function thedesired activate cannot still all in thelist items and through gone have you If > > > incompletely. aredisplayed aredisplayed, orthey them notall of displayed, not are entries book Phone > > not possible. functions Telephone adapter into the phone snap-in themobile Insert signal. theBluetooth of strength the adjust to ble possi- itis phone, mobile the on Depending phone must be connected as a telephone. Themobile orauxiliary phone? source audio an as connected phone mobile the Is volume. data the Reduce notes? as such information stored toadditionally e.g. due great, too is entry book phone the of volume data The is toohigh. stored The number of phone book entries to be characters. special with entries It maynot be possible to displayphone book are transferred. speaker separately. speaker and ofthemicrophone thevolume Adjust ter console. entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card SIM the or phone mobile ofthe entries book phone the only that possible is It completed. yet not entries has book of transfer phone The atelephone. as phone mobile notpossible? call the Connect Outgoing thefunction. Activate deactivated? function phone is theauxiliary and phone asanauxiliary paired phone Is mobile the * or place it in the vicinity of the cen- the of vicinity the in it place or *
transmitted. caller name of thenonly the number, is the onephone than more is assigned acontact If played; otherwise, only the number isdisplayed. aredis- ofthecontact number and name the bookandis transmitted bythe network, then in ofthecaller phone the is thenumber stored If calls Receiving call Incoming 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. settings. the deletes this is unpaired, thetelephone When phone. each for separately out carried be must areonly possible during Adjustments a call and volumes. toadjust essary the Depending on the mobile phone, it may be nec- with you. onthephone oftheperson volume the and phone mobile the on microphone the of volume the adjusts automatically vehicle The inrently use. cur- control remote the for stored is setting The reached. is volume desired the until theknob Turn Adjusting volume Operation osoe rs h IIjoystick. MINI the press store: To joystick. MINI the turn adjust: To or"Loudspeak." "Microphone" setting: desired the select To settings" "Volume "Tone" "Settings" been activated. been callerThe if mailbox is to redirected itthe has or wheel onthesteering button Press the Accepting a call 3. 2. 1. or wheel onthesteering button Press the Endingcall a Rejecting a call rently active. rently rejected is matically cur- if call thephone with a auto- is phone auxiliary the to call incoming An work. net- the by transmitted is it if displayed is ber With calls to the auxiliary phone, only the num- "Reject" "Accept" "Active calls" "Telephone" "End call" 157
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Telephone 4. 3. 2. 1. Dialing a number numbers phone Entering 158 3. 2. 1. Establish another call during an active call. call second a Establishing hold. is put on call theexisting and call is accepted The sounds. signal acall-waiting call, ongoing an during in comes call second a When forthis. adjusted tobe need may phone themobile and service provider the by activated tobe have may function This another party to a whilespeaking call Accepting provider. theservice by and phone mobile the by supported functions be must These connect two calls to form a conference call. It is possibletoswitch between two callsand to information General parties multiple with Calls voice. by numbers isIt also toenterphone possible "Accept" eette symbol. the Select individually. digits the Select "Dial number" "Telephone" "Active calls" "Telephone" "Hold" eette symbol toswitch tothecall on hold. the Select hold..."."on with: identified is hold on call The highlighted. call:Active between two calls,toggling Switching 2. 1. in can active muted calls. microphone be The Muting the microphone 2. 1. phone conferencecall. toasingle tele- calls connected be Two can call conference a Establishing another party, the other call can continued. can othercall be the party, another call is terminated. If onecall is terminated by conference a when ended always calls are Both 4. "Active calls" "Telephone" Establish twocalls. a list. number or select thenewphone Dial it from existingThe call is put on hold. "Conference call" 2. 1. call. a make to selected isbe can entered. The entries number phone telephone andshows allcontacts for which a ofthe contacts the accesses book phone The Displays book Phone 4. 3. 2. 1. DTMF code. the requires This machine. answering an access services orto devices, control e.g. remotelyto network to access gain to dialing keypad Use Keypad dialing > > vated: acti- isautomatically microphone muted The 3. "Phone book" "Phone "Telephone" puter. com- theon-board via code DTMF the Enter connection Establishing "Telephone" callers onhold. between switching When If a new call is made. "Keypad dialing" "Keypad "Microphone muted" rently active. rently iscall cur- oraTeleService ornetwork reception 2. 1. a contact Calling numbers depends on the mobile phone. mobile the on depends numbers dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone numbers phone 20 last The phone. mobile transferred to the vehicle, depending on the list are in thetelephone The numbers of dialed information General Redialing be edited. can contact The 3. 2. 1. stored in the vehicle. in themobile phone.copy A of theentry is contact is changed, the changes are not stored If a menu. inthe"Contacts" entries Changing Editing a contact contacts, refer topage refer contacts, of the location thestorage indicates symbol A Call not possible. The mobile phone has no no has phone mobile The possible. not Call the connection is established. is connection the one phone number. Select than with symbol.more Contact phone number, Select the lished. one with Contact symbol. is estab- Theconnection number. phone the Select contact. desired the Select "Edit entry" Open "Options". contact. the Highlight 164 . 159
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Telephone 2. 1. board computer the Selecting usingthe number on- 160 onthe phone. mobile depends numbers played. The sorting and displaying of phone dis- are received last 20calls The phone. mobile onthe depending vehicle, intothe transferred list is received calls inThe of the telephone calls Displaying calls Received 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. contacts the in entry an Saving 3. 2. 1. Deleting asingle entry or all entries is established. connection The 3. "Redial" "Telephone" Select ifSelect necessary "Store contact" necessary. if theentries Complete or"Other". "Mobile" ness", "Busi- "Home", type ofnumber: Select the contact". existing to or"Add "Store asnewcontact" Open "Options". entry. the Highlight list". "Delete or entry" "Delete Open "Options". entry. the Highlight necessary. if thedesired number, Select phone entry and 3. 2. 1. Deleting asingle entry or all entries is established. connection The anentry. Select list the from number a Calling switched on. switched ignition is if system the thehands-free using continued be can vehicle the of range Bluetooth the outside been initiated Callsfrom have that free system the phoneFrom mobile to thehands- versa. vice and phone using can mobile continued the be tem sys- thehands-free using Calls being conducted information General Hands-free system 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. contacts the in entry an Saving 2. 1. "Delete entry" or "Delete list". "Delete or entry" "Delete Open "Options". entry. the Highlight Select ifSelect necessary "Store contact" necessary. if theentries Complete or"Other". ness", "Mobile" "Busi- "Home", type ofnumber: Select the contact". existing to or"Add "Store asnewcontact" Open "Options". entry. the Highlight "Received calls" "Received "Telephone" rs h button on the steering wheel. Press the thedialog: To start Example: dialing phone numbers > > > > The concept byvoice* Operation phone. mobile the of manual owner's the to refer also phone, mobile ofthe thedisplay on appear that instructions the follow point, this At phone. phoneif so desired, dependingonthe mobile themobile using be also tem can continued sys- hands-free using the Calls being conducted phone hands-freeFrom system tomobile phone. ofthemobile manual owner's refertothe also phone, mobile of the play dis- onthe that appear theinstructions follow then automatically, not occur does switch the If mode. hands-free to switched automatically Depending on the mobile phone, the call is { { You say For example: example: For Dial number Dial vation system. vation {{ system. activation { questions. or announcements of means by ported cases,In theentryprocessmany is sup- wheel. steering the from hand your removing The mobile phone can be operated without ...... }{{ } }} Verbal instructions to use with the voice voice the with use to instructions Verbal Indicates responses of the voice ofacti- thevoice responses Indicates }{{ { 2 5 7890 456 123 } The voice control answers control voice The {{ onequipment: Depending Dialing number Dialing 123 456 7890. Continue ? Continue 7890. 456 123 saythenumber Please }} process. entry the toaccelerate intoa sequence bined Each digit can be spoken individually or com- tonine. digits from zero system recognizes The aloud. areread Possible commands for spoken must word be word. that commands default understands system The Having possible commands read aloud Possible commands or wheel onthe steering button briefly Press the input voice Finishing 2. 1. system activation voice Activating Voice commands function, e.g.: function, a run to commands of number a often are There Using alternative commands Say the command. thesteering on button wheel. pressBriefly the { { { Cancel Help Dial name }} } }} . }
. } or { Name } . 161
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Telephone established. is tothedesired subscriber connection The numbers phone Dialing Calling 162 Delete the entry. theentry.Store setup. can be entries 50 to Up memory. phone's mobile ofthe independent are and voice by entered entries be must The book. phone voice own your create to necessary be may it your is vehicle equipped, on how Depending book* phone Voice Redialing deleted. are point this to up entered digits All number phone Deleting essary. nec- as asoften repeated be can command The digits. repeated the has thesystem after can deleted be sequences Digit number phone Correcting 3. 2. 1. { 4. 3. 2. 1. { 3. 2. 1. { Correct number Correct Delete Redial Confirm the query with with thequery Confirm whenprompted. thename Say { { prompted to do so by the system. being after number thephone Say seconds. 2 about of duration speaking a notexceed aloud. Do thename Say { { number. thephone Say { Delete name Save Dial number Dial Save name Save } } . . } } . . } } . } } . . . { Yes } . > > > Ambient conditions connection. phone ofatele- establishment the delay unnecessarily voice and vocalpitch canchange. This can emergency call.an In stressful the situations, toinitiate system activation voice usethe not Do calls Notes on emergency Notes > > announcement. knob during Turn Adjusting volume Selectentry. an Listen toand select the entries: entries. all Delete panorama glassroof panorama closed to avoid interference. noise toavoid closed Keep doors, windows, glass doors, sunroof windows, Keep system. activation voice the of language the in commands say Always speed. sis and empha- volume, normal with and smoothly numbers letters and thecommands, Say currently in use. fortheremotecontrol is volume The stored is changed. sources ofotheraudio volume the even if thesame, volumeremains The 3. 2. 1. 2. 1. 3. 2. 1. Confirm the query with with thequery Confirm whenprompted. thename Say { is read. entry Say opened. is book phone forreading dialog The { Confirm the query again with with again thequery Confirm Confirm the query with with thequery Confirm opened. is book phone deleting for dialog The { Dial name Read phonebook Read Delete phonebook Delete { Dial number } . * } , or convertible top convertible , or } when the desired thedesired when . } . { { Yes Yes } } . . { Yes * / } . * 2. 1. adapter snap-in Inserting thecenter armrest. In location Installation adapter* Snap-in > arrow atthefront, adapter thesnap-in Insert cover. the remove and button the Press speaking. vehicle while noise in the ambient Avoid it clicks into place. into clicks it 1 , and press downward, arrow downward, press , and 2 , until Removing mobilephone 2. 1. Inserting mobile phone Press the button and remove the mobile phone. themobile remove and thebutton Press tions and press down until it engages. down and press tions connec- electrical the toward upward ing fac- the buttons with phone mobile the Push phone. mobile the of connection fromthe USB and connector the antenna of cap protective toremove the necessary be itmay phone, mobile the on Depending 163
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Office being distracted. usersby otherroad and car's occupants the endangering avoid to this, allow conditions road vehicle. tothe isconnected that Data are regularly updated in a mobile phone ble. is possi- phone tothemobile access read Only thevehicle is stopped. Contents are only displayed completely when are available for Office. A limited numberof compatible mobile phones connectivity. www.mini.com/ to go areavailable, functions and phones mobile which about information For standards. radio Bluetooth therequired and functions these Display if themobile phone compatiblysupports Control using the be displayed can messages text and notes, tasks, appointments, Contacts, information General Overview Office 164 > > Requirements appointments. order, example, tocorrectly for display trol Display and on the mobile phone in page referto date, and time, zones, Time phone must be confirmed. mobile the to access data the phones, mobile some In connected. and vehicle isA suitable phone mobile with paired the the MINI joystick only when traffic and and traffic when only MINI joystick the while driving. not use Office Operate Do 66 , are correctly adjusted on the Con- the on adjusted correctly are , * < be dialed. can numbers thephone and fornavigation tions destina- can used as be The addresses phone. mobile the by supported is function ifthis well 3. 2. 1. played. dis- are appointments asupcoming aswell tasks and active messages ofunread number The Current office 2. 1. contacts Displaying tacts from the mobile phone edited. and con- The be created can Contacts information General Contacts Selecting the entry Selecting display the desired to details office" "Current "Office" "Contacts" "Office" * are displayed as played. inis thevehicle, stored only and is this dis-copy stored in the mobile in themobile stored phone not are thechanges is changed, acontact If 4. 3. 2. 1. Editing a contact 2. 1. Dialing a phone number* contacts: of the location thestorage indicates symbol A issearch offered. anA-Z of contacts, onthe number Depending order. arelisted in alphabetical All contacts No symbol In the vehicle; thevehicle; In the address symbol No Symbol "Storecontact in vehicle" theentry. Change "Edit contact" contact. desired the Select is established. connection The number. phone Select contact. desired the Select Storage location Mobile phone nation. adesti- as checked been has thevehicle; address the In destination. asa checked been has not * . A oftheentry copy * 3. 2. 1. adestination* as acontact Selecting 3. 2. 1. address. Internet one and addresses, email addresses, 3 2 numbers, 8phone to up with associated be can contact A New contact phone. mobile the on changed not is address The vehicle. the in stored is it of copy a stored, and is corrected address the If 4. 3. 2. 1. this. ensure in the vehicle. The address can be checked to stored data navigation the to correspond must An address is that tobe inused route guidance Checking theaddres Correct the address. the Correct in data stored tion the vehicle.Inthis case: naviga- the with compared be must address tion" destina- asanother "Add or guidance" "Start With contacts from the mobile phone mobile the from contacts With address. Select contact. desired the Select Open "Options". "Contacts" "Office" Correct andstore the address, ifnecessary. destination" as "Check Open "Options". address. the highlight and contact desired the Select s as a destination* * 165 , the , the
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Office 10. 9. 8. 4. 166 types. contact various assigned be can addresses and numbers Phone Contact types 7. 6. 5. Symbol "Store contact vehicle" in contact "Store if"Accept address" necessary addresses. all for possible is guidance destination that in ensures thevehicle. stored This data tion addresses that are contained in the naviga- It address. Enter is only enter possible to When equipped with a navigation system: "New contact" page to refer type, acontact textassign Enter field. entry the to next To symbol fill in fields: theentry select the fields" input "Delete entries: previous with filled already are boxes input If 166 . Business address address Private Other phone number number phone Mobile number Business phone Private phone number Meaning 4. 3. 2. 1. deleted. be cannot Displaying contact pictures* contact Displaying fer from the sorting selected. candif- ofnames thesorting mobile phone, the stored in were thecontacts how on Depending 3. 2. 1. Names can be displayed in different orders. name sorting* Selecting 3. 2. 1. ofthecontacts. thebeginning at is It listed address. a home store possible to isIt address home a Defining deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone are vehicle inthe stored are that contacts Only Deleting contacts mobile phone. the stored in the vehicle are exported, not those in page to Profile, refer Personal using imported and be exported can Contacts contacts Exporting/importing deactivated. The displayof all contact pictures isactivated or 3. 2. 1. function. this support must phone depends on the mobilephone. The mobile transmitted pictures of number The vehicle. the to whenthe phone is vehicle connected mobile the stored in are contacts stored with Pictures "Delete contact" or "Delete all all contacts". or "Delete "Delete contact" "Options" contact. the Highlight "Contacts" last name" first, or"Display: name" first last, "Display: Open "Options". "Contacts" "Storecontact in vehicle" Create acontact. "Home" "Show images" Open "Options". "Contacts" 26 . The contacts . The *
3. 2. 1. sender contacts inthe Saving 2. 1. a message text sender Calling Text message page refer to aloud, messages text Reading Reading messagealoud A symbol indicates thetype message. of Message type 2. 1. messagesDisplaying transmitted. are not phone from the auxiliary Messages vehicle is stopped. areonly the completely sages displayed when maytakeseveral minutes. transmission Mes- the thefirsttime, for is phone paired mobile a After activated. separately be to have may tion supported bythe service providerorthe func- maynotbe messages tothevehicle. sion Text transmis- supports phone themobile whether on depends messages text of displaying The information General Messages Symbol Unread message. Unread message. Read contact" as new contact" to existing "Store or"Add Open "Options". message. the desired Highlight symbol. the Select "Messages" "Office" Select the desired message. desired the Select Text message type Message 169 . 1. day calendar Selecting 2. 1. next dayscan 50 displayed. be the and 20days thelast from Appointments calendar Displaying Calendar 2. or stored in thecontacts. or stored directly used be can these then addresses, email or numbers contains phone theappointment If Using contact data 2. 1. appointmentDisplaying Select date. Select played. dis- are day current the of Appointments "Calendar" "Office" > > > > daySelect ordate. desired > > if necessary: through appointment, To scroll appointment. desired the Select "Today" day" "Previous "Date:" day" "Next eette symbol. Select the joystick. Turn theMINI 167
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Office 2. 1. 168 2. 1. days. 90 next the within mustbe tasksDisplay that completed open Displaying tasklist Tasks page referto aloud, anappointment Reading Reading an appointment aloud 4. 3. 2. 1. Storing contactdata > > To display a contact or dial a phone number: "Tasks" "Office" contact" "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new Open "Options". address. oremail number phone a Highlight 169 lish a connection. lish a Select a phone number to directly estab- of thecontact. view a detailed todisplay contact a Select "Use contact data" contact "Use "Use contact data" contact "Use . 2. 1. taskDisplaying 2. 1. Sorting task list Reading a task aloud, refertopage aloud, atask Reading aloud atask Reading 3. 2. 1. Storing contact data 2. 1. contacts. inthe stored directly beor used thesecan addresses, then oremail numbers phone thetaskcontains If Using contact data > > thetask, To scroll necessary: through if desiredSelect task. the > > > criterion: sorting select To list. task the in topline Select the contact" "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new Open "Options". address. oremail number phone a Highlight > > To display a contact or dial a phone number: eette symbol. Select the joystick. Turn theMINI date" "Due "Subject" "Priority (!)" lish a connection. lish a Select a phone number to directly estab- of thecontact. view a detailed todisplay contact a Select "Use contact data" contact "Use 169 . Reading a note aloud, refer to page to refer aloud, note a Reading Reading a note aloud 3. 2. 1. Storing contact data 2. 1. stored in the contacts. directly be or used thesecan then addresses, numbers or email phone thenote contains If Using contact data 2. 1. note a Displaying 2. 1. notes Displaying Notes contact" new as "Store or contact" existing to "Add Open "Options". address. email or number phone a Highlight > > To display a contact or dial a phone number: > > thenote,if necessary: through To scroll note. desired the Select displayed. are notes All "Notepad" "Office" lish a connection. lish a Select a phone number to directly estab- of thecontact. view detailed a todisplay contact a Select symbol. Select the joystick. turn theMINI "Use contact data" contact "Use 169 . > > > > > options: following the is have aloud, themessage you read While being 2. 1. you. to be aloud entries, notes can read tasks, and appointment textmessages, have You can aloud Reading displayed. ortaskis appointment associated The 3. 2. 1. passed or a task is due, the reminder is deleted. has After anappointment are tasks displayed. Reminders for imminent appointments and reminders Displaying Reminders IIjoystick toward the left.MINI the move thereading, To terminate Skip aparagraph. over symbol. the Select Skip back one paragraph. symbol. the Select thebeginning. from again message Read reading. the resume to again Select reading. the Interrupt eette symbol. the Select ornote. task, appointment, message, desired the Select reminder. desired the Select "Reminders" "Office" "Pause" "To beginning" "To 169
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Office to page to refer suitable phones, mobile on information For What to do if… 170 > > > > > ter. cen- MINI oryour theHotline contact please andstill cannot activate the desired function list in the allitems through gone have you If stored in the vehicle. be can pictures contact 200 tomax. Up Contact pictures are not being displayed? takeafewminutes. can vehicle and phone mobile the between Synchronization phone. mobile the by shortened arealready Texts pletely? of displayed entries Texts are com- not phone. mobile the in and Display Control the in set incorrectly is date or time, zone, time The time? phoneare not being displayed at thecorrect mobile the from tasks or Appointments vehicle. the in displayed are ofthem all not phone, mobile in messages stored the notes,and tasks, ofappointments, onthe number Depending future. the in 90days than more or are ascompleted marked been tasks have The future. the in 50days than aremore and than20days are older appointments The is deactivated. function Office The phone. iary Themobile phone isconnected asauxil- an nected. missingfunction or is notcorrectly con- Themobile phone isnot suitable for the displayed? arenotbeing sages ortextmes- notes, tasks, Appointments, 152 . wise, wise, mayresult. malfunctions can only be used when the vehicle is stopped. thevehicle only used can when be applications safetysoftware some reasons, For users. and other road occupants vehicle endanger can distracted being your precaution, this observe > > lation: their instal- and applications, software available phones, mobile suitable on information For Notes > > > > Connected: ofMINI function the met for must be following requirements The Requirements try-specific. coun- be can applications software of range The joystick. theMINI using ated are oper- They Display. ontheControl displayed are applications software These MINI. your into software applicationsofa suitable mobilephone certain integrate to Connected MINI use can You The concept Overview MINI Connected at your MINI center. MINI at your at: www.mini.com/connectivity. with Connected. MINI included are not incurred costs additional Possible Appropriatemobile phone contract. phone mobile Suitable areoperational. and phone the mobile The software applicationsare installedon Connected. MINI of applications software the support must phone mobile the of system operating The by the manufacturer of your MINI; other- MINI; your of manufacturer the by approved applications usesoftware Only tion allows you to so. allows to do dotion you you If not situa- thetraffic entries when make Only < * < refer to page to refer knob onthe radio, thevolumecontrol or using connecting cable with the USB interface using phone the special themobile Connect 2 1 Connect via the USB audio interface. phone Connecting a mobile buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page refer to wheel, steering onthe buttons be can Volume adjustments the using made joystick. computer and can be operated using the MINI ontheon-board are displayed applications the Connected, MINI of activation and vehicle the to phone mobile the of connection successful After Connected Using MINI refertopage adapter, snap-in the Themobile phone canalso be connected using Connecting via the snap-in adapter* the AV-IN connection AV-IN the software application. software a activating and selecting e.g. phone: mobile forthe manual refertothe owner's phone, To perform other operations on the mobile R onco /"35mm 1/8"/3.5 connector TRS AV-IN connection: USB interface 130 . 2 . 163 . 1 and and 171 11 ,
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE MINI Connected 2. 1. 172 phone. mobile the on application software the restart to necessary it call, be may aphone After sametime. system at the hands-free Bluetooth and the Connected MINI it can software impossible to make use their and ofmobile used versions phones Certain themobile for phone. connection Internet oftheavailable speed the on depend applications software Some minutes. few a take phone. onthemobile applications software installed Display depends on the rangethe Control of on shown is that Connected MINI of extent The 3. "MINI Connected" menu. main the button. opens This Press the Select the desired software application. desired software Select the tion from the telephone to the vehicle can can the vehicle to telephone the from tion applica- ofthesoftware transfer data The < 173
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communication
MOBILITY
MOBILITY
REFERENCE Refueling event of an accident. afire in the orcause explosion an cause and aleak candevelop vehicle. in They your tainers fuelcon- fuel. notcarry spare any Do handling tank and amessage willbedisplayed. Refueling 176 ing. bewill if displayed is thegas loose cap or miss- A message escape. can vapors fuel and properly aclick. hear clearly until you clockwise it and turn thecap Fit Closing 3. 2. 1. Opening Fuel filler flap < the flap. filler fuel the to attached the bracket in cap the gas Place counterclockwise. gascap Turn the flap. filler fuel the Open observe allobserve applicable regulations when and measures all precautionary Take otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the refueling; before theengine off Switch cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed closed be cannot thecap otherwise, cap; the to attached theband not pinch Do < < sidewall of the cargo compartment theMINI. in compartment ofthecargo sidewall illustration ofexample, the the shows way By 2. Convertible: MINI MINI: 1. flap: filler fuel the release manually can you malfunction, electrical an of event the In fuelfiller the flap releasing Manually symbol. The fuel filler filler Thefuel issymbol. released. flap fuel with pump the onthegreen knob Pull area. ofthecargo wall Remove the cover from the left-hand side- aged. and fuelengine supply systemwill dam- be 85 E85, containing i.e. with fuel fill thetank not Do willverter result. liters. US gallons/8 capacity ofreserve 2.1 13.2USgallons/50Approx. liters, the including damage could occur. and arenotguaranteed functions wise, engine thefirsttime. off fuel is fullThe clicksfiller whenthe nozzle tank > > to lead asthat would thetank, filling while nozzle filler thefiller lifting into Avoid the pipe. pletely insert com- filler the nozzle refueling, When damage. injury property and personal fuel; thereisof adanger handling otherwise, has no effect on the engine life. ontheengine effect has no This temperatures. outside high at starting when sounds knocking produce may engine the ing, If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat- > > AKI. minimumThe AKI Rating is: less alsousegasoline may with you However, Thisgasoline is highly recommended. 91 gasoline/AKI Premium Super fuel Required Fuel specifications tank capacity Fuel Observe whenrefueling thefollowing % ery system. recov- ofthefuel-vapor efficiency reduced shutoff pump premature Cooper: 87 Cooper: Works: 89 Cooper S, John Cooper ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. the ethanol, Otherwise, nor with < permanent damage to the catalytic con- thecatalytic to damage permanent otherwise, gasoline; notuseleaded Do km,be sureto refuel; other- miles/50 30 is therange less displayed If than observe all applicable regulations when and measures all precautionary Take < < may also result in unscheduled maintenance. also resultinmay unscheduled recommendations these with tocomply Failure Gasoline. Detergent Tier Top as isadvertised that asgasoline such byswitching to arecognized high-qualitybrand that respond areusing,you werecommend you tothefuel berelated could suspect you which problems drivability encounter you Should altitude. high and temperature ambient suchashigh tions condi- environmental under especially certain in orworkmanship. materials todefects respect with warranties applicable the will ofcosolvent, not amount void equivalent an plus methanol or3% MTBE is, 15% that oxygenateswith up oxygen to2.8% by weight, orother ethanol 10% including up toand ing contain- Fuels Canada. and States United the in sale offered for gasolines etc., among additives, composition, volatility, quality: fuel in ences differ- significant hasindicated Field experience brands Use high-quality engine could be be could damaged. engine drivability, starting and stalling problems problems stalling and starting drivability, in result may fuels poor-quality useof The fied minimum the Otherwise, fuel grade. minimum fied speci- the below gasoline notuseany Do < 177 <
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Wheels and tires or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, page Monitor, Pressure Tire the reset or the tire inflation pressure is pressure higher. tireinflation the warm, are tires When hours. 2 least at for parked hasbeen thevehicle driving km or when 2 miles/ of 1.25 Thismeans maximum tires. after a oncold pressures inflation only tire the Check overthe vehicle. control toloss lead of tirecan on aflat drive to Attempts response. braking and handling vehicle's your seriously impair will tire flat A tires. flat i.e. using run- flat deflated, tires,when except with drive not Do accident. risk of an the driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and vehicle's your notonly can compromise that a condition pressures, tire incorrect with tires on bedriving may you thisprecaution observe to trips. long If fail starting you before and month sure. pres- tire ofthespecified the maintenance and ofthetires condition the on that depend safety driving toagreat extent, and, comfort driving isIt notmerely the tires' also service life, but for safetyyour Information pressures Tire inflation and Wheels tires 178 pressureChecking reinitialize the flat tire monitor, page monitor, tire theflat reinitialize pressure, inflation tire the adjusting After a twice least at ifnecessary: it, correct and pressure inflation regularly tire the Check < 77 . 75 < , > > > the following: pressures, observe tion right tire infla- of the identification correct For you. MINI. YourMINI dealer will be toadvise glad ofyour by themanufacturer recommended temperature. tire sizes for thespecified at ambient pressures inflation correct all the provide below tables The pressureInflation specifications sure islocated behindthe bumper. forchecking theinflationA valve pres-extension the space-saver spare tire* Checking the tire inflation pressure of door is open. door driver's thedriver's on postthe door side when tire can inflation found These pressures also be km/h. or 160 mph 100 up speeds to a of maximum traveling for umns sures listed on the following inpages the col- tire inflation pres- totherespective pressures and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust km/h or mph 160 normal driving For to100 up km/h 100 mph or 160 pressuresTire inflation to driving up for Maximum allowable driving speed allowable driving Maximum conditions Load sizes forTire yourvehicle < tire sizes approved and the tire brands brands tire the and approved sizes tire tothe apply tire inflation pressures The tire damage and accidents may occur. may accidents and damage tire otherwise, speed; this exceed not Do km/h. 160 MINI Cooper tire inflationpressures More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page M 90 15 R 70 wheel: 115/ Emergency RSC W 82 18 R RSC 205/40 M+S V 84 17 R 205/45 RSC V 84 17 R RSC 205/45 M+S V 84 17 R RSC 205/45 M+S V 87 16 R RSC 195/55 M+S H 87 16 R 195/55 RSC H 87 16 R RSC 195/55 M+S H 82 16 R 175/60 H 84 15 R 175/65 M+S H 84 15 R 175/65 M+S T 84 15 R 175/65 temperature = ambient Cold tires. withcold cal table are indicated in psi/kilopas- the in specifications pressure All Tire size tire inflation pressures is 100 mph or mph pressures istire 100 inflation forthese speed permitted maximum The < 0406/2 04060/420 60/420 60/420 60/420 38/260 38/260 33/230 33/230 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Speeds up to a to up Speeds max. of occur. could law the of violations otherwise, limits; speed local and all national Observe maximum occur. could accidents and damage tire km/h. Otherwise, or160 mph 100 exceeding those including speeds traveling for umns onthefollowingsures listed thecol-pages in pres- tireinflation totherespective pressures 0 p r10km/h 100 mph or 160 Tire inflation pressures driving above for Pressure specifications in psi/kPa psi/kPa in specifications Pressure xeso 0 p r10km/h, adjust mph or 160 of 100 excess in order speeds In todrive at maximum 217 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Speeds including including Speeds . those exceeding those exceeding < 179
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Wheels and tires MINI John Cooper Works tireMINI John inflationpressures MINI Cooper S tire pressures inflation 180 0/0R1 2WRC4/8 1204/0 44/300 44/300 41/280 41/280 More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page RSC W 82 18 R 205/40 RSC W 84 17 R RSC 205/45 M+S V 84 17 RSC R XL 205/45 M+S H 86 17 R 185/50 temperature = ambient Cold tires. cold with cal table are indicated in psi/kilopas- the in specifications pressure All More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page RSC M+S H 82 16 R 175/60 RSC W 82 18 R 205/40 RSC V 84 17 R RSC 205/45 M+S V 84 17 R 205/45 RSC M+S V 87 16 R RSC 195/55 M+S H 87 16 R 195/55 RSC V 87 16 R 195/55 temperature = ambient Cold tires. cold with cal table are indicated in psi/kilopas- the in specifications pressure All Tire size Tire size Tire size 8203/6 12041/280 41/280 38/260 38/260 41/280 41/280 38/260 38/260 38/260 38/260 33/230 33/230 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Speeds up Speeds a up to Speeds up Speeds a up to max. of max. of Pressure specifications in psi/kPa psi/kPa in specifications Pressure Pressure specifications in psi/kPa psi/kPa in specifications Pressure 217 217 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Speeds including including Speeds . . Speeds including including Speeds those exceeding those exceeding those exceeding those exceeding MINI Cooper Convertible tire inflationpressures More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page M 90 15 R 70 wheel: 115/ Emergency RSC W 82 18 R RSC 205/40 M+S V 84 17 R 205/45 RSC V 84 17 R RSC 205/45 M+S V 87 16 R RSC 195/55 M+S H 87 16 R 195/55 RSC H 87 16 R RSC 195/55 M+S H 82 16 R 175/60 M+S H 84 15 R 175/65 H 84 15 R 175/65 M+S T 84 15 R 175/65 temperature = ambient Cold tires. withcold cal table are indicated in psi/kilopas- the in specifications pressure All Tire size 0406/2 04060/420 60/420 60/420 38/260 60/420 38/260 35/240 35/240 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Speeds up to a to up Speeds max. of Pressure specifications in psi/kPa psi/kPa in specifications Pressure 217 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Speeds including including Speeds . those exceeding those exceeding 181
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Wheels and tires MINI John Cooper Works Convertible tire inflation pressures inflation tire Convertible Works Cooper John MINI MINI Cooper S Convertible tire pressures inflation 182 0/0R1 2WRC4/9 2204/1 45/310 45/310 42/290 42/290 More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page RSC W 82 18 R 205/40 RSC W 84 17 R RSC 205/45 M+S V 84 17 RSC R XL 205/45 M+S H 86 17 R 185/50 temperature = ambient Cold tires. cold with cal table are indicated in psi/kilopas- the in specifications pressure All More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page RSC M+S H 82 16 R 175/60 RSC W 82 18 R 205/40 RSC V 84 17 R RSC 205/45 M+S V 84 17 R 205/45 RSC M+S V 87 16 R RSC 195/55 M+S H 87 16 R 195/55 RSC V 87 16 R 195/55 temperature = ambient Cold tires. cold with cal table are indicated in psi/kilopas- the in specifications pressure All Tire size Tire size Tire size 9203/7 22042/290 42/290 39/270 39/270 42/290 42/290 38/260 39/270 38/260 39/270 35/240 35/240 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Speeds up Speeds a up to Speeds up Speeds a up to max. of max. of Pressure specifications in psi/kPa psi/kPa in specifications Pressure Pressure specifications in psi/kPa psi/kPa in specifications Pressure 218 217 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 0 p/6 km/h mph/160 100 Speeds including including Speeds . . Speeds including including Speeds those exceeding those exceeding those exceeding those exceeding Nominal width in mm e.g. Speed code letter, letter, in code Speed tires not onZR rating, Load in Rim inches diameter Radial belt construction f A Temperature A AA 200Traction wear Tread example: For width. section maximum and shoulder tread sidewall between thetire on whereapplicable found be can grades Quality QualityUniform Tire Grading Tire age tire design and Tire size code fortire make Manufacturer's instance: For DOT code: ofTransportation. Department US ofthe meetthe guidelines withcodes Tires DOT Number Identification Tire or300km/hY =up to mph 186 W =up or270km/h to 167 mph V =up or240 to150mph km/h H =up or210km/hto 131 mph T 118mph= up or190km/hto to100mph Q = up or 160km/h letter code Speed size Tire tires. right the choose and identify to easier it makes ofthetire side the on ofthelabeling Knowledge Tire coding ront of the R on ZR tires onZR R ront ofthe spect ratio in ratio spect Ξ DOT xxxxxxx3010 2/5R1 1V 91 17 R 225/45 and climate. characteristics in road differences and practices service habits, driving in variations to due norm significantly the depart from may ever, and use, of conditions their theactual how- upon of tires performance depends 100. The relative asatire graded course thegovernment well on 150 would wear one and one-half one-half wearoneand (1 150 would tire graded a example, For testcourse. ernment onaspecified conditions gov- controlled under tested ofthetire when onthewear rate based rating is acomparative grade tread wear The wearTread grades. these to Temperature A B C Traction AA A BC Tread wear DOT QualityGrades performance which all passenger car tires must tires car passenger all which performance toalevelof C corresponds grade failure. The tire sudden to lead can temperature excessive and life, tire reduce and degenerate to tire the of material the cause can temperature high tained a specifiedon laboratory indoor test wheel. Sus- controlled conditions under whentested heat generation of heat and its ability to dissipate the to resistance thetire's C, representing and B,are grades A, thehighest, temperature The Temperature tics. characteris- traction or peak ing, hydroplaning, tests,and does not include acceleration, corner- performance. traction poor have may faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C sur- test government specified on conditions controlled under as measured wet on pavement stop thetire’s ability to represent grades Those AA, A, B, and C. are lowest, to highest from grades, traction The Traction < Federal Safety Requirements in addition Allto tirescar mustconform passenger based on straight-ahead braking traction tothis tire is assigned grade traction The < γ ) times as 183
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Wheels and tires buildup and possible tire failure. heat cause can combination, in or arately sep- either loading, orexcessive underinflation, speed, Excessive overloaded. and not inflated by law. required the minimum exceed that wheel test the laboratory on performance of els lev- A represent and B Grades 109. No. Standard Safety Motor Vehicle Federal under the meet 184 tiressafety, should installed.new be suitable for winterconditions. In the interestof theybecome less perceptibly mm, in/4 of 1/6 depth tread a past down wear tires winter When Winter tires surface. onthe road arepresent water of small only amounts when even hydroplaning, mmthere isincreased an riskof high-speed3 in/1.6 1/16 below mm.Attread 1/8 depths in/ lation only specifies a minimum tread depth of legis- European for example, although, mm, 3 in/ 1/8 below drop not should depth tread The Tread depth depth. thetread Check tread. the in lodged objects foreign for and damage of wear,signs yourtires regularly tread Inspect for Tire condition tires. forspecially reinforced Designation XL tires. mer sum- than properties better winter have These tires. all-season and Winter M+S tire, page the of ontheside RSC theletters containing symbol will tires by acircularYou run-flat recognize tires* run-flat - RSC established for a tire that is properly is properly foratire that established this tire isfor grade temperature The 185 . < users. otherroad and occupants forvehicle gerous dan- extremely be can damage tire Otherwise, there. towed thevehicle have personnel. necessary, If trained MINI repair procedures with correspondingly to according works ortireshop that dealer MINI thenearest to carefully so,drive Todo checked. or totheright aspulling severely left. such behavior, road otherabnormal toany applies causedple, by be driving curbs. sameover The defect. forexam- This othervehicle can, some tire failure indicate or can operation vehicle normal during encountered vibrations Unusual damages. consequential and hazards road to susceptible more are parts suspensions and tires tolow-profile Due wheels, tires, notethat please damage Tire mm. in/1.6 1/16 is depth tread remaining the indicators, wear the of level the to down tire is When tread worn wearindicators. these incorporate identifytire's tiressidewalls that the on Indicator, Wear forTread lettersTWI, the the tire's distributed around circumference; are ba the in indicators Wear depth tread Minimum < and have wheels and tires thoroughly immediately speed reduce cases, these In se of the tread groove groove se ofthetread the new wheels arebalanced. new the Makesurethat related hazards. safety and age dam- ofsubsequent is adanger properly, there If out workis notcarried this manufacturer. MINI ofthe specifications with the inaccordance ing specially that work- shop has personnel trained New wheels tires and wheels New page tire, flat a of Indication to refer tire, aflat with todrive oncontinuing information For ifeven depressurized. restrictions, subject to tobe certain used tinue sidewalls thetire con- in can that ensures the reinforcement rim. The special a and tire porting aconditionally self-sup- tires comprise Run-flat onthesidewall. RSC theletters with acircle is tires run-flat identifying symbol The tires*Run-flat tires. ofthe actual wear regardless of the years, 6 nomorethan after replacement tire ommends rec- MINI ofyour themanufacturer brittleness, of development asthe such reasons, various For in 30oftured week 2010. manufac- was tire the that means ...3010 DOT coding: tire the in is of contained tires date manufacturing The age Tire by yourMINI dealer or a specialized tire only mounted tires and wheels new Have < 75 . nation again soonaspossible. as again nation combi- tire wheel and previous the mount aged, dam- atire has been After configuration. tread useonly response, tires single of brand and a vehicle and handling good maintain To systemssuch vehicle various DSC. as ABS and toensurereliable of also necessary operation is tires and wheels of combination correct The your vehicle. for combination tire and wheel correct the about willYour MINI dealer glad be to inform you if are mounted. vehicle they of the safety ensuretheoperating cannot fore there- if foruse,and aresuited they determine to tires and wheels non-approved evaluate not ofyour can- MINI manufacturer The accidents. toserious leading ultimately bodywork, and tire between result can in tolerances contact ing sions, variations in asmanufactur- factors such thesame dimen- tires have theoretically may particular model. Although other wheels and foruseonyour it hasspecifically that approved life. can which tire age, result in a limited service in variations wide often and casing structures tire different potentially forthis include causes The safety. driving impair could this as tires, be gladbe to adviseyou. Correct wheel Retreaded tires puncture, refer to page refer puncture, ablea todetect notbe may Monitor Pressure Tire otherwise, the electronics; TPM with wheels winter to tires,summer orvice versa, only use from over changing tires or new mounting When electronics Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM < mends mounting only wheels and wheelsand tires only mounting mends ofyour recom- MINI manufacturer The mendsthat you avoidusing retreaded ofyour recom- MINI manufacturer The s and tires 77 . Your MINI dealer will will dealer MINI Your . < 185
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Wheels and tires ter. cen- MINI or tiredealer at your is available label This view. of yourfield in displayed be must tires forthemounted speed permitted maximum the stating a label tires, winter forthe permitted that than higher of speeds thecar is If capable dents. to do so could result in tire damage and acci- Recommended tire brands tire Recommended 186 to attention speed Pay winter tires. as levels same performance of cold-weather the provide to fail they tires, generally summer than traction better winter tiresprovide M+S drop below45 orif roads tires temperatures onsnowy of winter use the recommends ofMINI manufacturer The Special characteristics of winter tires advise you. event of a flat. Your MINI dealer will be glad to the in isavailable tire spare nospace-saver that in mind Keep safety. foryour run-flat tires own mount towinter and vice versa, tires summer from over or changing tires new mounting When tires*Run-flat characteristics. safety in handling est terms of standards and tires properly meetthe high- used, these When tire. the of sidewall the on aclearly designation with visible MINI marked are They brands. tire certain recommends MINI your of manufacturer size, the tire each For winter tires mounted on your your car; on tiresfailure mounted winter for the limit the speed with comply Always < 7 / +7 6 . Although all-season .all-season Although Snow chains*Snow pressure. the change necessary if rotation, thetire after pressure inflation the check Always willMINI dealer glad be to you. advise Your theaxles. between be rotated may wheels the tear, and wear even an maintain to order In tear. and wear different exhibit may tires Depending on the individual use, front and rear Swapping wheels the among axles ofthetire. sidewall onthe indicated sure tire inflation maximum pres- not the exceed Do fuels. and grease Always protect tires against all contact with oil, aspossible. light to exposure aslittle with place dry cool, a in tires wheels and store Always Storage refer to page to refer DTC, the or activate DSC the deactivate briefly to driving it snowchains, be with can usefulWhen incorrect issue reading. an might instrument km/h. 50 or mph 30 of aspeed exceed Do snowchains. not mounting when instructions themanufacturer's Observe > Works: Cooper John > > tires. thefollowing with wheels chains attach inOnly pairssnow to the front details. dealer for more MINI your tact Con- recommended. and asroad-safe classified MINI, of your by themanufacturer tested been have chains fine-link snow of types certain Only 8/0R1 6HMSX RSC XL M+S H 86 17 R 185/50 R 16M+S 175/60 R 15M+S 175/65 snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the otherwise, the mounted; chains are snow if Monitor Tire Flat the initialize not Do 73 . < damage and related safety hazards. of thereis subsequent adanger properly, out notcarried is this If work manufacturer. MINI the of specifications the with accordance in working hasspecially that trained personnel workshop or only dealer a aMINI by carried out vehicle onyour necessary work have the observed, be to theregulations with familiar arenot you If training. technical professional required the damage the headlamp washer washer system theheadlamp damage Pull the lever. Releasing Hood Under thehood repair operations on your vehicle onyour without vehicle operations repair or service any toperform attempt Never lamps if the hood is unlocked as this may may this as unlocked is hood ifthe lamps head- thewindshield and not clean Do < * . < Press the release handle and open the hood. the open and handle release the Press thehood. open you before Closing Opening clear; otherwise, injuries result. clear; may otherwise, is hood ofthe path closing surethatthe Make it close securely. and stopat once closed, engage. to cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard 40 in/ 16 ofapprox. fromaheight thehood Close wiper arms are against the windshield surethatthe make damage, To avoid vehicle that the hood is not completely is notcompletely thehood that vehicle any your you If while driving notice signs < < 187
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Under the hood Important parts of the engine compartment the engine of parts Important 188 4. 3. 2. 1. oillevel Checking engine refueling. e.g. when regularly, level oil engine the Check conditions. driving and style driving on is oil dependent engine The consumption oil Engine 1 3 2 the guide tube and pull it out again. itoutagain. pull and tube guide the into all theway thedipstick push Carefully towel orsimilar material. paper cloth, alint-free with itoff wipe and minutes 5 approx. after out dipstick the Pull theengine. off Switch vehicle on a level surface. km,park the fordriving atleast 6 miles/10 i.e. uninterrupted after temperature, ing operat- at thevehicle'snormal engine With thecover under Battery, Engine oil fillerneck Engine oil dipstick 188 189 209 engine. liter. quart/1 US is1 dipstick onthe thetwomarks between difference to the corresponding quantity oil The 6 5 4 marks on the dipstick. oil thetwo The between shouldlevel be Engine compartment fuse box system washer window and fortheheadlamp fluid forwasher Reservoir Coolant expansiontank dipstick. Excess oil will damage the onthe mark theupper beyond notfill Do < 189 57 207 result. may healthhazards Otherwise, the containers. aged. Only use approved High Performance oil. Performance High useapproved Only engine. the of life the for critical is quality oil engine The your MINI. of manufacturer the by approved been have oils engine onwhich you advise can dealer Your oils engine Approved types Oil manufacturer. MINI the of specifications the with accordance in working hasspecially that trained personnel workshop a or dealer MINI a by only changed oil the Have change Oil dipstick, page droppedtojust above the lower mark on the has level oil until the engine oil liter of quart/1 US Do not add maximum quantitythe of 1 Adding engine oil < in engine damage. engine in asthis result could useoil additives not Do children and comply with the warnings on on warnings the with comply and children of reach ofthe etc.out greases, oils, Keep otherwise, the engine could be dam- could theengine otherwise, km; miles/50 oilAdd within thenext 30 5W-40 and 5W-30. 5W-40 and 0W-40, oils areSAE 0W-30, approved The < 188 . < < of coolant additives. coolant of onthecontainers. instructions the follow to it health, is to areharmful your important tives advise you. which additives are suitable and will be glad to able for your MINI. Your MINI dealer knows aresuit- additives available all commercially Not halfadditive. and of half water consists Coolant burns. cause can Coolant API SMorhigher used: be may specification lowing thefol- with oil of another liter quart/1 US 1 to up available, not are oils engine approved the If Alternative oil types Min and Max markings. the between is ifit correct is level coolant The down. cooled has until theengine thehood notopen Do Checking coolant level tal protection regulations when disposing disposing when regulations protection tal environmen- with the appropriate Comply damage engine may result. Because addi- otherwise, usesuitable additives; Only coolant is hot.Escaping theengine when system cooling the to coolant add not Do < < 189 <
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Under the hood as soon as possible. loss eliminated forthecoolant reason the Have 3. 2. 1. off Topping 190 Turn the cap until there is an audible click. untilthereisaudible an cap Turn the overfill. Slowly fill to the correct fluid level; do not open. to turning continue then escape, to pressure counterclockwiseto allow anyaccumulated alittle tank oftheexpansion cap Turn the remote control unit that you lastused. thatyou control unit remote dealer MINI the your therefore hand should forservicing car you takeyour in you Whenever approach. maintenance anoptimized propose and unit, control remote the from data this out while you are driving.Your MINIdealer can read control remote the in information requirement service- stores continuously vehicle Your Service data in the remote control displayed, page dates prescribed legally any and tasks tenance for times selected main- or distances remaining Control the can you Display, On have the driving. trouble-free for basis the builds system the requirements, reflects ownindividual your that regimen maintenance and aservice you define letting By requirements. service and future current the determine to this uses Service Based Condition account. into MINI your of conditions driving takethedifferent special algorithms and Sensors Based Condition Service CBS icant benefit. signif- will a prove servicing of record prehensive If and when you come to sell your MINI, a com- costs. maintenance vehicle tominimal respect with of your MINI. Theobjective isto optimize efforts safety operating and traffic of the preservation the supports System MINI Maintenance The System Maintenance MINI Maintenance 64 . regular maintenance. regular specified the received has vehicle your that ify Booklet for Canadian models. These entries ver- Guide Service and Warranty and models for US Booklet Information Warranty and cle's Service vehi- your in entries by confirmed are cedures pro- service thatthese ensure to thetime Take operations performed at your MINI dealer. requirements. service on information additional for models BookletforCanadian Service Guide and Warranty and models US for Booklet mation Infor- Warranty and Service consult your Please models Canadian for Booklet Guide Service and Warranty and models US for Booklet Information Warranty and Service OBD socket. the via adevice by checked be can emissions up make the that primary components The OBD Diagnosis forOn-Board Socket assured. CBS Service is not Based of ness Condition mends that you have service and repair repair and service have that you mends recom- oftheMINI manufacturer The rectly, page rectly, cor- set always is date the that sure Make < 67 ; theeffective- otherwise, < 191
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Maintenance days. afew outwithin go should theindicator ened, thentight- is cap filler the If up. tolight indicator damaged. become can components engine mechanical In addition, converter. thecatalytic especially components, of emissions-related damage misfiring quickly can Severe lead to serious as thenearestMINI visit dealer assoon possible. and speed your If reduce happens, engine. this excessive misfiring or a malfunction in the indicates This continuously. up light or flash will Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps possible. as soon as checked car the Have Emissions 192 and development of vehicle functions. optimization orfor repair and processes service the forsupporting outareused read data The able devices, in particular at your service center. suit- by read be can thedata control; remote the in stored be partly can and thevehicle in stored are data These settings. user and malfunctions, operation, the about data displays vehicle Your Data memory that fuel vapors are escaping, causing an an causing areescaping, fuelvapors that conclude may system theOBD ened, tight- properly is not cap filler thefuel If caution. due exercise and speed your but journey, your moderate continue Youcan higher emissions. is producing warningThe lamps on. The come vehicle short term and the brake rotors can corrode. can rotors brake the and term short the over efficiency braking reduce can water and road salt can damage the vehicle. Washing your vehicle your Washing care External vehicle. the cleaning for notintended that are products notuseany Do vehicle. the of windows or doors the open always cleaning, interior For packaging. the on instructions hazard and warning the age. your vehicle. for protection and care optimum offer They tice. in prac- and in thelaboratory tested been have MINI. and foryour services care and products cleaning youon advise to pleased be would Service MINI foryour care vehicle. and to clean products manufacturer-approved using ofyour recommends MINI manufacturer The value of your MINI. the care to helps and maintain cleaning Regular Car-care products Care < brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, otherwise, them; todry briefly brakes the thevehicle, apply After washing Dirt washed. frequently should be vehicle the months Especially the winter during or health-damaging substances. Follow Follow substances. or health-damaging hazardous contain may agents Cleaning dam- cause orsolventsasthese may hol alco- cleansers containing notuseany Do theproducts and tested, been have ucts Care oforiginal Prod- MINI The ingredients < < < < > > > > wash: car the into driving for Preparations damaged. be > > > lowing points: tem is suitable for yourMINI. Observe thefol- driving wash, if sys- check the car Before into the windows. the around vehicle the toclothcar washes. given should be Preference Car washes 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. the vehicle canroll: surethat wash, make thecar into driving Before Automatic transmission sibility that they could be damaged. if thereis antennas, apos- ers ortelephone Remove additionalattachments, e.g.spoil- wipers. the protect to betaken can that measures ator about tect it from damage. Ask the car wash oper- Deactivate the rear window wiper rearwindow the Deactivate tentional wiping. Deactivate the rain sensor rain the Deactivate antenna. therod Unscrew Maximum Maximum permissible tire width page If fold mirrors,necessary: in the outside page dimensions, Vehicle so that the vehicle canroll. vehicle so that the ignition control lock in the theremote Insert engine. off the Switch brake. theparking Release positionN. to selector lever the Move lock. theignition in Access, evenwith Comfort control, the Place remote 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the chassis could could chassis the otherwise, cm; in/10 4 than higher tracks with washes car Avoid washes; otherwise, water may drip into drip into may water washes; otherwise, car high-pressure notuse automatic Do 45 . < * 215 to prevent unin- toprevent < * and pro- 193
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Care 30 cm. 30 long offor lessthan1ft/ oratadistance a time washers. pressure for high- instructions theoperating Observe canbe damaged, or watercanpenetrate. vehicle ofthe parts high, too the temperature or close, toohigh, thedistance is If pressure too the 60 aexceed maximum temperature of 140 do not and fromthevehicle distance ficient Steam jets/high-pressureSteam washers 194 cleaner. awindow mirrors with and windows the inside of and the outside Clean Windows instead. icedeicers usewindow an scraper; Do not remove accumulated ice and snow with water. of plenty with thenwashing and shampoo asinsects, with such by soaking tamination, con- and dirt Remove agents. cleaning rosive cor- or abrasive use not do and dry wipe not Do Headlamps wiping. unintentional prevent to ofpressure. aslight amount applying brush orawashing asponge vehicle with the Clean your hand. by car washing when shampoo if ofwater and, great necessary, car deal a Use washing Manual 6 . tance withControl high-pressure washers tance such not spray Do asPark sensors Dis- suf- youmaintain makesurethat washers, jets using orhigh-pressure steam When containing quartz. containing themirrors cleaners not with clean Do theignition orturnoff sensor rain the vate thewindshield, deacti- cleaning Before ing vehicles by hand. by vehicles ing wash- regarding local regulations Observe < < < < < 7 / ible top once ayear. top once ible convert- the to treat agent impregnating an Use instructions. manufacturer's the follow and read Always stains. heavy toremove attempting if agents cleaning top convertible special Use toleak. seams its and top convertible the cause may methods care or cleaning Theimproper seals. rubber similar fluids. These maycleaners damage the paint thinners, or gasoline, solvents, removers, > > > > theseinstructions: follow Please operation. ible top largely depends on its proper care and theconvert- and life service of appearance The Care oftheconvertible top sor. rain sen- with the interfere and blades wiper the of wear premature cause can are on,and wipers of streaks. theformation prevent Clean with soapy water and change regularly to Wiper blades < the rubber seals. rubber the will corrode the convertible top and damage properties which corrosive have they since immediately, droppings bird any Remove ventilation. sufficient is there that sure make time, of period longer a for area in is anenclosed parked thevehicle If cleaner. interior and cloth microfiber using a remove them precautions, despite headliner ontheinside occur spots water If occur. may marks chafe and mildew, stains, water orfrozen.Otherwise, thetop is wet when compartment convertible the in top ible convert- the stow and fold to attempt Never the convertible top, do not do not use spot top, convertible the from stains toremove attempting When dows cause streaks when the windshield the when streaks cause dows onthewin- dirt and preservatives Wax, < paints. MINI original with specifications factory to repairing paint damage professionally according recommends oftheMINI manufacturer The rusting. toprevent scratches acid-free wheel cleaner. wheel acid-free with regularly them Clean wheels. light alloy the on collects that dust brake produces system The wheels*Light-alloy polish. usechrome treatment, additional For salt. road with whencontaminated especially additive, ashampoo necessary, if and, water grill and doorhandles withcopious quantitiesof such asthe radiator parts vehicle clean Carefully Chrome parts* occur. could noise damage and otherwise, products. care rubber or water with treat Only Rubber seals waxes. or synthetic carnauba that contain usepreservatives only paint, the surface. To preserve paint ontheclean beads longer no whenwater necessary is Preservation Preservation Removing paintworkdamage work. tothepaint- damage toprevent droppings bird as spilled fuel,oil, grease, brakefluid, tree sap or Immediately remove aggressive materials such care ofvehicle correspondingly. extent and frequency the adjust to important therefore it. It damage is and vehicle paintwork the affect factors can someregions, environmental In substances. aggressive of effects long-term the from paint the protects and helps vehicle care your Regular retain its value Paintwork, care immediately repair stone damage or or damage stone repair immediately damage, ofthe severity on the Depending containing care products on rubber seals; rubber on products care containing notusesiliconDo sprays orothersilicon- < < the leather's protective layer. protective leather's the lotion since dirt and grease will gradually attack leather a using year a twice leather the Treat soiled. heavily toget tends it since regularly cleaned be should Especially when the leather has a light color, it basis. aregular dust on cleaner toremove vacuum Useaclothor brittle prematurely. to become increased wear and causing the leather surface leather have an abrasive effect,leading to ofthe folds and pores gritinthe road and Dust ofnatural leather. properties typical the of thegrain is one in variations Light product. erly. prop- function they toensure that ice-free and sure that all Velcro fasteners areclosed. all fasteners sure that Velcro onthepackaging. tions instruc- the cleaners. Observe interior suitable and cloth orlint-free microfiber sponge a soft In ofcase serious such asliquidspots stains, use dirt. face sur- remove to cleaner vacuum a use Regularly Upholstery/fabrics care Internal External sensors Leather/leather coverings* cause damage. jetshotterthan 140 steam < turer of your MINI is a high-quality natural natural your is a MINI turer of high-quality such as the Park Distance Control clean Control asthePark Distance such sensorsonthevehicle the outside Keep The leather clothing can damage seat covers. seatcovers. Make damage can clothing of items orother pants on Velcro fasteners forcefully. rub not Do totheseams. upholstery up Clean highly alkaline, or abrasive or highly alkaline,cleansers orabrasive acid-containing, aggressive, use not Do <
processed by the manufac- < 7 /60 6 as they may may they as < < 195
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Care matted. thecarpet become may otherwise, direction; doing so, rub forward and back in the driving cleaner. When interior or an water and cloth ber amicrofi- dirty, clean are very with thecarpets If cleaned. to bebe matscan removed Floor for cleaning. e.g. removed, been have they after again tened fas- aresecurely mats surethat floor the Make for approved been have fastened. be appropriately can vehicle and the that mats floor use Only objects. other oneoronto ing anexist- onto mats floor additional notplace Do pedals during driving. of the function inhibit may the they otherwise, Carpets/floor mats* Carpets/floor 196 safety. on impact negative a have thus and action reeling the impede straps belt Dirty Safety belts Wipe dry a with soft cloth. moist strips cloths. with clean decorative Only strips* Decorative will the surfaces. as these damage cleaners. plastic free solvent- ifnecessary, and, water with clean Only > > > > include: These Interior plastic parts Mat parts Display panes Lamp glass Plastic surfaces out of the movement range of the pedals; pedals; the of range movement the of out objects other and carpet, floormats, Keep destroy the webbing. chemically, not clean Do as this may cleaners, cold orsimilar, fuel, thinner, quer asalcohol, lac- not use solvents such Do < < < according to MINI manufacturer specifications. manufacturer toMINI according your MINI dealer or a workshop that works from foradvice ask please threemonths, than car your for todrive more arenotgoing you If storage Vehicle CD/DVD drives or damaged. otherw may components orelectrical Surfaces thedevice. from away kind lint-free cloth. non-scratching, soft, or a cloth cleaning display a use ments, clean displaysTo such as radios or display ele- Displays damage parts of the drive. could CDs as notusecleaning this Do hold cleaning agents. Keep fluids of any ofany fluids agents. Keep cleaning hold or house- notusechemical abrasive Do damage. cause can this as display the whencleaning hard Avoid too pressing < ise becomecorroded < < > 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Changing thefront wiper blades Wiper blades > theflatload floor. underneath stored itis version; theequipment varies with that kit vehicle tool anonboard comes Your vehicle with On-board vehicle tool kit components Replacing for space-saver spare tire spare for space-saver kit tool vehicle onboard with set change Tire Insert the new wiper blade. Insert thenewwiper top. the toward arm wiper past blade the thewiper Pull shield. thewind- toward blade thewiper Unhook arrow. spring, securing the Press horizontally. blade thewiper Position Fold up the wiper arm. set tirechange and kit tool vehicle Mobility Systemwith onboard * 202 204 MINI: changing the rear wiper blade at your MINI dealer. bulbs replacement of a selection obtain can You the bulb by its base. tissue, similar, cloth orsomething clean orhold bulb's surface and reduce itsservice life.Use a the burn will into of contamination amounts to competent feel not do here. orthat is yourself not described perform you that work any form per- dealer MINI your having recommends MINI your of carefully.manufacturer The handled be therefore, should, They safety. to vehicle makeanessential contribution bulbs Lamps and Lamps and bulbs 4. 3. 2. 1. before you open thehood. open you before 8. 7. until it engages audibly. engages it until into the fixture blade wiper Press new the themounting. of out thus and limit the against blade wiper the Press far willas it go,arrow. as theback toward blade wiper the Rotate Fold up the wiper arm. Fold down the wiper arm. itengage. hear you until position into Press your bare fingers, as even minute minute fingers, bare asyour even bulbs of with the glass new touch Never wiper arms are against the windshield surethatthe make damage, To avoid < < 197
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Replacing components MINI manufacturer. MINI the of specifications the with accordance in ing work- hasspecially that trained personnel shop Caring for headlamps, refer to page to refer headlamps, for Caring turer. manufac- bulb the by provided instructions any ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe could result. To avoid possible injury or equip- circuits short otherwise, question; in sumer 198 this. notprohibit does islation leg- thatlocal provided care, withgreat journey the continue and lamps fog the on less, switch fails neverthe- lamp a xenon If oftimes. number excessive an off and on switched not are they that provided low, very failure of probability the is very life ofthesebulbs service long and The lamps* Xenon center. service your by checked them have light, inthe droplets e.g. water present, is moisture alot If of changed. tobe need glassesdo not on.Theheadlamp is switched thelight after ashorttime disappears densation occur on the interior of outsidelights. The con- may cool weather, In orhumid condensation lens glass Headlight oftheretina. irritation hours;otherwise, this cause for could several diodes. 1 light-emitting Class as tional laser diodes, and legislationdefines them conven- to related are diodes light-emitting displays your These vehicle. and in controls the of formany lenses serveasthelight sources cent behind translu- diodes installed Light-emitting Light-emitting diodes LEDs < below, contact a MINI dealer or a work- For any bulb replacement not described please contact your MINI dealer. aim, headlamp adjusting and checking For always begin byswitchingoffthe con- working on electrical systems, When eyes directly to the unfiltered light source light source theunfiltered to directly eyes the orexpose thecovers not remove Do < < 194 < . age to the headlamp system. totheheadlamp age compartment theAccessing lamp from theengine damaged. risk there is Otherwise, a if of isinjury thebulb H13 bulb, 60/55 watts Halogen low beams and high beams age to the headlamp system. totheheadlamp age cover. the tach toreat- in reverse order samesteps Follow the 2. 1. cover: the Removing compartment. theengine from changed be can bulb low-beam/high-beam The out improperly. carried is lamps xenon on the work if injury fatal is there voltage, a of risk tohigh Due facturer. manu- ofthe MINI thespecifications with dance working specially trained personnel in accor- by aonly MINI dealer that ora workshop has holder. it outofthe and take thecover open Flip tab. the Press erwise, leaks could occur and cause dam- thecover; oth- wheninstalling Be careful wear safety glasses and protective gloves. gloves. protective glassesand safety wear Therefore, pressurized. is bulb H13 The erwise, leaks could occur and cause dam- the cover; oth- wheninstalling Be careful including bulb replacement, carried out system, lamp xenon on the work any Have < < < < 1. W 21 bulb,21 watt PY signal a bulb turn Replacing 2 1 Accessing the lamps via thewheelwell parking lamps, and fog lamps roadside lamps, parking signals, Turn 1. Replacing the bulb 2. 3. and remove it, remove and arrow Turn in the wheel. the in Turn lamps parking/fog Parking/roadside signal Turn arrow counterclockwise, lamp the Turn Push on the catch, arrow onthecatch, Push cover, proceed in reverse order. reverse in proceed cover, replace the and thenewbulb To insert the connector,arrow 2 2 . . 1 , and disconnect disconnect , and 1 ,
3. 4. 2. 1. 5watt bulb, bulb lamp W5W Replacing a parking/roadside parking 3. 4. 2. 5. Unscrew the upper counterclockwise. bulb theupper Unscrew so, thecover counterclockwise. To do turn cover, proceed in reverse order. reverse in proceed cover, replace the and thenewbulb To insert Remove cover wheel. the in Turn To do so, turn the cover so, thecover counterclockwise. To do turn Remove the inside cover. so, thecover counterclockwise. To do turn Unscrew the bulb counterclockwise. thebulb Unscrew Remove cover ers, proceed in reverse order. reverse in proceed ers, cov- replace the and thenewbulb insert To 2 1 . . 199
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Replacing components 4. 3. 5. 2. 1. 35 watts bulb, H8 Replacing a fog lamp bulb 200 1. W 5 W bulb, watt 5 Side turn signals 4. 3. 2. Unscrew the counterclockwise. the lower bulb Unscrew connector. thecable Pull counterclockwise. turnthecover so, To do cover, proceed reverseorder. proceed in cover, the replace and bulb thenew To insert Remove cover thewheel. Turn in ward and remove. and ward for- grate ventilation withthe thelamp Push cover, proceed reverseorder. proceed in cover, the replace and bulb thenew To insert thebulb. replace outand Pull the holderbulb Unscrew counterclockwise. 2 . the cover of the luggage compartment wall.side compartment oftheluggage cover the page aid toLoading refer tion, posi- toitsuppermost top convertible the Move Convertible: MINI area. thecargo of thesidewall from thecover Remove MINI: Lamp access 3 2 1 Tail lamps ub2 at5Wt,W5W 5 W Watt, Watt/5 21 bulb Brake lamp W 5 W Watt, Watt/5 21 bulb lamp Tail LED signal Turn 103 , and , and remove 2. 4. 3. 2. 1. bumper. the of underside or rear the via lamps the Access 16W Watt, W Bulbs 16 lamps*/Reverse lights fog Rear 1. Changing cover, proceed in reverse order. reverse in proceed cover, replace the and thenewbulb To insert Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly place. into clicks audibly it that so holder bulb the Re-engage order. in ceed reverse pro- holder, bulb and bulb new the insert To replace. and counterclockwise bulb Unscrew bulb holder. remove arrows, and clips, clamping Squeeze compartment side wall, arrow bulbAnother is located behind the luggage arrows bulb thedesired counterclockwise, Unscrew 1 . 2 . ment included in included in vehicle: your ment equip- the on depending followed be should tire, aflat procedures different of theevent In regulations. guidelines all and safety if distance necessary. with Comply appropriate the at flasher warning or triangle a warning Erect aguardrail. behind e.g. place, a safe in Allpassengers should be outside the vehicle and P. position in lever selector the brake and shift into 1st or reverse gear or place parking the Engage lock. wheel steering the engage and position thestraight-ahead are in until thefrontwheels steering wheel Turn the ers. flash- warning hazard the on and switch traffic frommoving asfarpossible thevehicle Park ifications of your MINI manufacturer. MINI your of ifications thespec- with in accordance working personnel trained has specially that oraworkshop dealer MINI your contact malfunction, a of event the In for operation. technology usesLED lamp This Center brake lamp 1. 5watt bulb,License plate lamps C5W 2. Repairing a flat aflat tire Repairing 4. 3. left in the tab of the lamp housing, arrow housing, of lamp the tab inthe left thelamp ascrewdriver, to push the Using Remove lamp,Remove the arrow Insert the lamp. thebulb. Replace down: break- a of event the in measures Safety 2 . < 201 1 .
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Replacing components 2 1 area. inthecargo mat floor Preparations set* change tire and kit tool vehicle MINIMobility Systemonboard with > > 202 7 6 5 4 3 set tire change andkit tool vehicle withonboard System Mobility The ing wheel. ittothesteer- affix and bottle thesealant from label limit forthespeed theadhesive Remove bottle. sealant the thetireif possible. etrated pen- have bodies which foreign not remove Do System. Mobility the with drivable made be thetirecannot if dealer MINI nearest the Contact or more. mm 4 in/ 1/8 approx. measures puncture tire the if tive ineffec- be System may Mobility theMINI of Use > Hexagon wrench Hexagon bottle Sealant Run-flat tires, page Run-flat section MINI Mobility System, refer to the following Compressor eyelet screwdriver/PhillipsFlat screwdriver, towing Wheel stud wrench Vehicle jack hook Extractor page tire, spare with change space-saver Tire ity System found on the compressor and and ity System foundonthe compressor theMobil- onusing theinstructions Follow 204 * < * * * 185 is located under the the under located is stored in the compressor housing. in the compressor stored hoseare connection and cable Connector, 9 8 7 6 2 1 compressor and Sealant 5 4 3 pressure inflation the tire reducing for button Release pressure tion tire infla- forindicating the gauge Pressure On/off switch wheel and sealant bottle or the compressor and thecompressor to connect hose Connection Filling hose limit Sealant bottle andadhesive label withspeed interior, page interior, in thevehicle socket the for cable and Plug Compressor forthesealant bottle Holder tle. bot- sealant the on date use-by the Note < 96 4. 3. 2. 1. sure. 7. 6. 5. Filling the tire with sealant > > > tem, proceed as follows: Sys- theMobility with tirepuncture a To repair Using the SystemMobility defective wheeland screw the filling hose ofthe valve the from cap thedust Unscrew position. upright an in housing onthecompressor bottle thesealant Insert thehoseisnotkinked. sure that Make bottle. ofthesealant connector the onto it screw and housing compressor the hose theconnecting Pull bottle. sealant the Shake the compressor during this phase. the compressor kPa. notswitch off Do psi/500 73 approx. kPa. psi/180 26 approx. of sealant andachieve atire inflationpressure with tofilltire the minutes 3 to8 approx. and let is runfor Switch onthe compressor running: engine With the Insert the plug is switched off. that compressor the Ensure valve. the onto bottle sealant the of page interior, vehicle the in socket power Correct the tire inflation pressure inflation tire the Correct sealant the Distribute Filling the tire with sealant < sealant may emerge under high pres- high emerge under may sealant otherwise, specified order; the in Proceed 96 inflation pressure can briefly rise to to rise briefly can pressure inflation the sealant, with tire the filling When . 3 into the lighter socket/ thelighter into 9 completely out of of out completely < 2
1. Stowing Mobility System 2. 2. 1. Correct the tire pressure inflation km/h. 20 mph/ If possible, do not drop below 10 sealant. the distribute km to evenly mls/5 approx. drive 3 Immediately Distributing the sealant 5. 4. 3. MINI dealer. thenearest Pleasecontact damaged. heavily 1. reached: is kPa not psi/180 of anairIf pressure 26 8. 2. Unscrew filler Unscrew hose compressor hose of the connecting Unscrew wheel. the from Screw the connection hose theconnection Screw location. atasuitable stop utes, min- ten or km mls/5 3 approx. driving After vehicle. the in back System Mobility Stow area. thecargo dirtying toavoid material suitable bottle in theempty sealant Wrap bottle. the from escaping from therestofsealant This prevents sealant bottle. onthe connection tle totheunoccupied thefiller Connect hose pressor directly tirepressor valve. onto the Unscrew the filling thefilling Unscrew hose Switch compressor. off the aged. device will overheat and possibly be dam- Inflate the tire again with the with the compressor. thetire again Inflate inthetireevenly. sealant liquid the todistribute m ft/10 33 approx. and backward thevehicle drive forward and 0km/h. 80 mph/ 50 of speeds exceed not Do still cannot be reached, the tire is too the bereached, still cannot kPa psi/180 of aninflationIf pressure 26 < < than 10 minutes; otherwise, the otherwise, minutes; 10 than for notrunthecompressor longer Do < 9 from the sealant bottle. thesealant from 2 of the sealant bottle 2 2 of the sealant bot- from the wheel fromthewheel 2 of com- of the 203
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Replacing components Have the Mobility System refilled. System Mobility the Have anced. assembly bal- wheel/tire thenew have and Replace the defective tire as soon as possible result in an accident. 3. 204 > > follows: tire, as spare proceed aspace-saver change To tire* spare Space-saver wheels Changing on Driving > > > > aged. Contact the nearest MINI dealer. MINI nearest the Contact aged. is tooheavily dam- tire the be reached, cannot still kPa psi/180 If aninflation of pressure 26 1to4. steps repeat thesealant. Then Distributing > > 4. Insert the plug Prepare for tire change, page for tire change, Prepare page spare thespace-saver tire, Remove Jack up vehicle, page up vehicle, Jack Mount space-saver spare tire, page spare space-saver Mount Drive with space-saver spare tire, page tire, spare space-saver with Drive page bolts, lug Tighten release button release pressure: press theinflation the To decrease aged. devicewill overheat and possiblybe dam- pressure, switch off tion the compressor. infla- current the check To compressor. the pressure: increase switch theinflation on To running: theengine With kPa. psi/180 to 26 pressure inflation Correct vehicle interior. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; doing so may so km/h; doing mph/80 50 of speed maximum permitted the not exceed Do pressure, drive the vehicle again, refer to refer again, thevehicle drive pressure, inflation the maintain thetirecannot If 204 < hn1 minutes; the otherwise, 10 than longer for notrunthecompressor Do 3 5 into the power socket in the in the socket the power into . < 206 206 205 < 206 205 damaged wheel. place the can you in which bag aplastic with kit apouch tool includes vehicle onboard The 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 area. in thecargo thefloormat under is stored tools setwith onboard change tire tire, spare the aspace-saver vehicles with On tire* spare space-saver a for set change Tire 2. 1. change set. the tire for compartment storage the of base the on area, inthecargo mat floor the isunder tire space-saver spare of screwthe connection The Removing the space-saver spare tire Lifting handle Lifting eyelet Towing screwdriver/Phillips Flat screwdriver spare tire saver space- the removing for Special wrench Vehicle jack Wheel stud wrench hook Extractor Chock, folding Take out the cover panel. outthecover Take cial wrench. thespe- with connection the screw Unscrew * 11. 10. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. of the space-saver spare tire. spare space-saver the of thevalve from thevalve extension Unscrew upward. facing valve with the spare tire thespace-saver Position therear. out toward vehicle the underneath spare tire thespace-saver Pull the liftingUnscrew handle. handle. lifting spare withtire the thespace-saver Lower heldmust by handle. be thelifting and tireisreleased spare space-saver The spring. securing the Squeeze slightly. handle lifting the Raise thread. ontothe kit tool vehicle onboard the from handle lifting the Screw avoid anysafetyavoid risks. size theoriginal tire as assoon to possible, of balanced. assembly wheel/tire thenew have ble and sary. Replace the defective tire as soon as possi- more noticeable with winter tires. winter with noticeable more are properties limit. thehandling close These to when properties in self-steering changes and bility duringbraking, longer brakingdistances aslower in sta- handling occur vehicle such track wise, there is arisk wise, there injury.of fatal other- jack; the by is supported thevehicle when or theengine thevehicle notliestart under Do capacity. load-carrying its reduce and full height support to its extending it from support base for the jack, as this would prevent notDo use awooden block or similar object as a etc. flagstones, ice, soft or slippery surfaces, support such as snow, on slip sideways could vehicle jack the or The slippery. not and firm level, is that parked onasurface the tire change when Only Driving with the space-saver spare tire Preparing for a tire change for the space-saver spare tire. spare space-saver the for 12. spare tire. spare ofthespace-saver it onthevalve place and cap from the extension thedust Unscrew mounted at one time. Mount a wheel a and wheel atonetime. Mount mounted tire spare maybe onespace-saver Only liest opportunity and correct it and ifliest neces- opportunity thetire pressure inflation attheear- Check speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Changes may Changes km/h. mph/80 50 of speed a exceed do not and cautiously Drive ing tires: tires: ing chang- when measures safety Additional page on tires flat regarding precautions safety the Observe aged wheel cannot be placed therecess bein placed cannot wheel aged dimensions, the dam- toitsDue different < < 201 . < < < < 205
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Replacing components 3. 2. 1. injury. personal and accidents cause could so do To kind. any of load any raise or to it with model vehicle another 3. 2. 1. 206 vehicle upthe Jacking Loosen thelugbolts ahalf by turn. Loosen lug ifthe Uncover bolts necessary. ing. roll- from thevehicle secure to precautions additional amoresevere slope, take with surface ona is changed thewheel If incline. an ison vehicle ifthe ofthewheel front orin side thevehicle other of the on wheel surface beneath the jacking point. jacking the beneath surface The jack base must be perpendicular to the wheel. the to closest point thejacking at jack the Place changing is raised off ground. off isthe raised changing are up untilyou thewheel thevehicle Jack point. jacking the of recess square the in head jack the insert up, jacking During Place the foldable chock thefoldable Place wheels only. Do not attempt to raise raise to attempt not Do only. wheels forchanging jack is vehicle designed The < * behind the behind the front registered on the vehicle by your to your by dealer onthevehicle registered battery have the replacement, abattery After available. fullybe not may functions or systems and aged dam- be could thevehicle otherwise, facturer; anced. assembly bal- wheel/tire thenew have and Replace the defective tire as soon as possible Nm. 140 or ft lb 103.3 torque: Tightening hazard. safety a present can bolts lug tightened incorrectly Otherwise, seated. arefirmly bolts thelug that pattern. inadiagonal thelug bolts Tighten bolts lug the Tightening 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. space-saver the Mounting spare tire Battery replacement mate. cli- in atemperate is operated thevehicle when last thelifeelectrolyte ofthebattery will for the maintenance-free, 100% is battery The Maintenance Vehicle battery Remove the jack. thevehicle. Lower pattern. Tighten all the lug bolts firmly in a diagonal bolts. remaining the in Screw opposite bolt holes. Screw at two least lug bolts finger-tight into place. into wheel thenew Lift bolts. lug the Clean hub. and ofthewheel surfaces mounting the or ofmud from dirt accumulations Remove wheel. the the remove lug bolts and Unscrew approved for your vehicle by manu- vehicle the foryour by approved been thathave usevehicle batteries Only with a calibrated torque wrench toensure wrench torque acalibrated with checked thewheels have Immediately < < during transport. during over tipping against battery the secure Always storage. and transport for position upright an in battery the Maintain center. recycling of the fuse box panels. cover fusebox of the inside onthe islocated diagram allocation fuse A manufacturer. MINI the of specifications the with accordance in working specially personnel trained has that workshop a Have the fuse changed only by a MINI dealer or fromacircuit overload. resulting vehicle the could afire Todo in this cause rating. Ampere > > > Fuses > mustreprogrammed: be and lost arealso settings Individual tialization. ini- require may fullyand functional not be may equipment loss,some power temporary a After Power failure Disposal onpage ing is refer off. to Jump-start- engine Connections, whenthe in thevehicle thebattery charge Only Charging the battery able. avail- arefully functions all comfort that ensure Contact your nearest dealer. nearest MINI your Contact initialized. be must system The applicable. if thesunroof, raise possible to be mayonly It Glass sunroof Glass Operability must be waited for, page for, waited be must Operability system Navigation stored again, page again, stored tobe cases,In mayhave stations some Radio These values must be updated, page date and Time used batteries to your MINI dealer or to a a to or dealer MINI your to batteries used oldthe return batteries, After replacing replaceit with afuseof adifferent color or or fuse ablown torepair notattempt Do 208 . < * , electric 133 < . 110 66 . . In the interiorIn vehicle latch. the Press thecover Opening the In engine compartment Press attherecess. Press out thecover Opening rightfootwell. ofthe side the On 207
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Giving and receiving assistance listed in the Contact brochure. inlisted theContact are Assistance for Roadside numbers Phone emergency. an of theevent in there assistance receive in hours a Youcan countries. many day 24 Roadside Assistance is available by phone Assistance Roadside Givingand receivingassistance 208 panel. trim side left the by well rearcargo isthe on located first pouch aid The cargo area in the MINI. illustrationthe shows ofexample, the way By essary. time, if good items larly any in nec- replace and regu- thecontents of dates expiration the check Therefore, life. service limited a have pouch inthefirst aid contained ofthearticles Some pouch*First aid MINI Convertible itout. totake thetab Press liftgate. ofthe theinside On MINI Warning triangle* sonal injuries. sonal bothvehicles, and toguard against possible per- ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or tothefollow- Carefully adhere occur. may dent handles. clamp with fully-insulated cables usejumper Only vehicle. another tohelp start same method the use also can You battery. vehicle's another to can be started by connecting two jumper cables thecar'sIf battery is flat,your own MINI's engine Jump-starting floor. compartment luggage the of bottom the at located is triangle warning The when the engine the is running, acci- or afatal engine when electrically any live nottouch parts Do < 3. 2. 1. occur. injury there is ofshorting. danger there a Connecting jumper cables 3. 2. 1. Preparation lift the cover to open, arrow toopen, lift thecover vehicle providing assistance. providing vehicle the of terminal orto astarting-aid battery the of terminal to thepositive cable jumper oftheplus/+ clamp terminal one Attach the positive terminal cover terminal positive the on left right of thetabs sides the and Release your MINI. thepositive of access terminal to partment com- in theengine cover the battery Open Switch off any consumers in both vehicles. both in consumers any off Switch vehicle. support the of engine the off Switch battery. the on be found can information This inAh. capacitance thesame mately approxi- and volts of 12 hasa cle voltage vehi- other of the battery the whether Check order, so that no sparks which could cause cause could which nosparks sothat order, in thecorrect cables thejumper Connect the bodies of the two vehicles; vehicles; otherwise, two ofthe bodies the between any contact notbe must There < < * , arrows 2 . 1 , and recharged. and checked battery the have necessary, If 4. 3. 2. 1. Starting the engine 6. MINI: in ground Body 5. 4. the above connecting sequence. connecting above the reversing by cables jumper the Disconnect afewminutes. engines for run Let the recharge. to battery thedischarged toallow in order attempt another before minutes afew wait isnotsuccessful, firststart attempt If the usual manner. in the vehicle theother engine of Start the idle speed. increased at allow itslightly torunforafew minutes vehicle and thedonor engine of Start the ground of the vehicle to be started. be to vehicle the of ground orbody ortotheengine battery ofthe nal termi- tothenegative cable jumper minus/– ofthe clamp terminal thesecond Attach vehicle. assisting the of ground battery orbody ortoan engine the of terminal negative the to cable jumper oftheminus/– clamp terminal one Attach started. tobe vehicle the of terminal orastarting-aid battery of the terminal positive tothe cable jumper plus/+ ofthe clamp terminal thesecond Attach engine. the start to fluids spray use Never < 209
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Giving and receiving assistance towed. cles. fitting and the vehicle could be damaged. be could vehicle the and fitting the tow Otherwise, fitting. tow the by vehicle the lift donot e.g. thetowfitting, of loading lateral Avoid only. roads paved on fortowing fitting tow away Tow-starting, towing 210 Front inrecess thebumper. the of out eye towing the of cover the out Push Access to screw thread page side, hand ontheright- thecover underneath area cargo in kit tool the vehicle is onboard stored It in the theMINI. rear of car. in or atthefront Itthe be in can screwed screw-in carried fitting be The mustalways tow Using a tow fitting < than the driver in a is being in thedriver that a vehicle than other passengers any transport not Do tions for tow-starting and towing vehi- towing and fortow-starting tions regula- and laws theapplicable Observe vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the in. Use way all screwit the and vehicle withthe provided thetowfitting only Use < 197 . < ing on local regulations. onlocal ing flashers,depend- warning hazard on the Switch effort. increased require will steering and braking Thus, is assistoff. is while engine the nopower There allow the steering to turn. just therear asthis cle with raised, axle would thevehi- nottow Do unavailable. be may wipers tail lamps,beams, turn signals, windshield and > > following: the observe please angle, an at bar tow the mounting avoid to Should vehicles. it impossible on both prove thesame side be on used should towfittings The impossiblebe to maintaincontrol. damaged. be can thetransmission lifted;wheels otherwise, Towing with a tow bar tow a with Towing Automatic transmission position. neutral in lever Gearshift transmission Manual Being towed Rear attached offset. attached ifitis forces lateral will generate towbar The be sharply limited during cornering. Clearance and maneuvering capability will refer to page to refer on, is switched ignition surethat the Make than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may may it otherwise, vehicle; the towed than mustnotbe lighter vehicle towing The front or withthe truck witha tow only transmission automatic with vehicles Tow < 50 ; the low otherwise, < < could result in damage. in result could 3. 2. 1. startedall. at betow- cannot transmission anautomatic with is vehicles cold, theengine when tow-started be only should converter withacatalytic Vehicles ble; instead, jump-start the engine, page possi- whenever thevehicle Avoid tow-starting Tow-starting age may result. flatbed. orona sling lift a with so-called truck a tow by transported Convertible orMINI MINI the Have Towing with a tow truck result in damage. could ofthevehicle otherparts it to attaching Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as usenylon ornylon always ropes straps. towing, istaut. rope thetow sure that make vehicle, towing the in off starting When Towing with a tow rope Shift into 3rd gear. 3rd into Shift Switch on the ignition, page with local regulations. flashers, comply warning Switch onhazard as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle itto ofthevehicle parts other attaching as only, fittings the tow to bar the tow Attach body and chassis parts; dam- and otherwise, body or fitting atow by vehicle the notlift Do when components stresses on vehicle associated and the jerking To avoid < < < 50 . 208 . 6. 5. 4. Have the vehicle checked. thevehicle Have flashers. ing warn- hazard off the switch and rope or bar thetow remove location, atasuitable Stop again. completely clutch the depress immediately starts, Aftertheengine release the clutch. depressed completely then and slowly clutch with the tow-started thevehicle Have 211
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
Communication
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
REFERENCE Technical data Engine data Engine Technical data 214 tegn pe rm6005506,000 4 5,500 4 6,000 whenpassing. e.g. rates of acceleration, at high torque briefly themaximum Overboost raises with overboost 4 speed At engine rpm with overboost torqueMaximum speed At engine put powerout-Maximum ofcylinders Number ipaeetcu in/ Displacement Works. Cooper John for Sareshown the Cooper the from differ that thevalues only data, In thetechnical p1111208 4,250 181 rpm 121 Nm lb ft/ hp cm μ 114/155 Cooper 1,598 97.5/ – – 1,730-4,500 1,600-5,000 192/260 177/240 Coe S Cooper 1,598 97.5/ onCoe Works Cooper John 2,000-5,100 1,850-5,600 207/280 192/260 1,598 97.5/ MINI Dimensions All dimensions radius in turning Minimum inches/mm. Information after the semicolon: different values for MINI Cooper S. Cooper for values MINI thesemicolon: after different Information Δ : 35 ft 10 in/10.7 m. m. in/10.7 ft 10 : 35 215
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Technical data MINI Convertible 216 All dimensions in inches/mm. Minimum turning radius Information after the semicolon: different values for MINI Cooper S. Cooper thesemicolon: for values MINI after different Information Δ : 35 ft 10 in/10.7 m. m. in/10.7 ft 10 : 35 MINI Weights prvdra xela b/g16475164751,675/760 1,664/755 ft/ cu 1,664/755 Cargo area capacity capacity load roof Approved lbs/kg rear axleload Approved > > load frontaxle Approved > > Approved gross weight > > extras optional all with fortravel, ready weight, Curb aultasiso b/g18080198801,918/870 1,918/870 1,830/830 mission Automatic trans- lbs/kg transmission Manual aultasiso b/g3341553441553,516/1,595 3,494/1,585 3,384/1,535 mission Automatic trans- lbs/kg transmission Manual aultasiso b/g2551102681202,668/1,210 2,668/1,210 2,535/1,150 mission Automatic trans- lbs/kg transmission Manual b/g157 6/5165/75 – 165/75 165/75 liters 1,962/890 lbs/kg 1,907/865 lbs/kg b/g341150358165– 3,538/1,605 3,461/1,570 lbs/kg b/g262115272120– 2,712/1,230 2,612/1,185 lbs/kg 5.7 - 24.0/ - 5.7 160 - 680 - 160 Cooper 5.7 - 24.0/ 5.7 - 160 - 680 - 160 oprS Cooper onCoe Works Cooper John 5.7 -24.0/ 160 -680 217
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Technical data MINI Convertible 218 Capacities grossvehicle weight. the or axleloads approved the either exceed Never Fuel tank 13.2/– approx. 50 Fuel grade: page Fuel grade: For page moredetails: approx. 50 approx. 4.5 approx. 8 13.2/– –/4.8 2.1/– system washer headlamp incl. system washer Window of including reserve Fuel tank 1,797/815 1,786/810 1,786/810 ft/ cu Cargo area capacity lbs/kg rearaxleload Approved > > load frontaxle Approved > > grossweight Approved > > Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras aultasiso b/g3501653611653,693/1,675 mission trans- Automatic 3,671/1,665 transmission Manual 3,560/1,615 2,811/1,275 mission trans- Automatic lbs/kg 2,811/1,275 transmission Manual 2,701/1,225 mission trans- Automatic lbs/kg transmission Manual b/g1908020795– 1,962/890 2,017/915 – liters 1,951/885 1,940/880 1,863/845 lbs/kg – 3,737/1,695 lbs/kg 3,638/1,650 lbs/kg 2,855/1,295 2,778/1,260 lbs/kg SglU quarts gal/US US 6.0-23.3/ 170-660 Cooper liters 6.0-23.3/ 170-660 oprS Cooper onCoe Works Cooper John 6.0-23.3/ 170-660 Notes 177 57 CD drive CD/Multimedia Useful short commands directly, menu ofwhich regardless functions you carry out can certain shortcommands With system activation forthevoice commands Short Accessing routeguidance Accessing entry destination Selecting services Accessing book phone the Displaying Accessing contacts Accessing Accessing the computer the Accessing Accessing settings Accessing Selecting a track a Selecting and track CD a Selecting Accessing tone tone control Accessing Function Selecting a CD a Selecting aCD Playing Function * * * * * * commands for the voice activation system. for the voice activation commands short theimportant is selected. Here are item Command Command { { { { { { { { { { { { Guidance address Enter Assist Phonebook Contacts Onboard info Settings C D track … track C D … …track C D Tone Select C D on C D } } } } } } } } } e.g. track 5 e.g.track } } } e.g. CD e.g. CD 3 track 5 219
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Short commands for the voice activation system 220 FM Radio control Tone External devices Selecting astation Selecting Selecting the frequency range thefrequency Selecting Selecting manual search manual Selecting FM stations Selecting screen split inthe details entertainment Displaying Selecting theradio Selecting Function Accessing tone control Function Selecting external devices Function menu Multimedia and CD the Opening Function CD * Command Command { Command Command { { { { { { { { { Entertainment details Entertainment Select station Select frequency Manual F M Radio Tone devices External multimedia and D C C D } } } } } } e.g. W-PLJ } } } } Telephone Stored stations Satellite radio AM Displaying accepted calls accepted Displaying Switching on the satellite radio satellite the on Switching Selecting a stored station stored a Selecting Selecting a satellite radio channel search manual Selecting To redial Choosing a station a stored Choosing stations stored Selecting Function satellite radio the Selecting Function stations AM Selecting Function To display phone book phone display To menu Telephone the Opening Function Command Command Command Command { { { { { { { { { { { { Received calls Received Satellite radio on radio Satellite Preset … Preset radio Select satellite Manual Redial Select preset Presets radio Satellite A M Phonebook Telephone } } } } } e.g. stored station 2 } } } } } } } e.g. 2 channel 221
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Short commands for the voice activation system 222 information General Navigation Displaying the address book address Displaying the instructions voice the off Switching Repeating a voice instruction voice a Repeating Switching on the voice instructions voice the on Switching Retrieving homeaddress Retrieving Selecting route Selecting criteria route Selecting Ending destination guidance destination Ending Starting destination guidance destination Starting guidance destination Selecting Entering an address an Entering Selecting destination entry destination Selecting devices Bluetooth Displaying Navigation menu Navigation Function messages of list Displaying the number aphone Dialing Function Command Command { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { Address book Address instructions voice off Switch Repeat voice instructions voice Repeat Switch on voice instructions voice on Switch Home address Home Route information Route preference Route Stop guidance Stop Start guidance Guidance Enter address Enter Enter address Enter Bluetooth Navigation Messages Dial number } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } Office* Destination guidance with intermediate destinations Map Changing the scale Automatic scaling of the map ofthe scaling Automatic Perspective map Map in the direction of travel Displaying messages. Map facing north facing Map Displaying contacts. Displaying destinations Special Function Displaying the map Function the Displaying last destinations Function Displaying current Office. current Displaying Opening Officemenu. Function destination anew Entering traffic bulletins Accessing * { Command Command Command Command { { { { { { { { { { { { { Map scale Map Map with automatic scaling automatic with Map Map perspective view perspective Map Map in direction of travel of direction in Map Messages Map facing north facing Map Contacts ofinterest Points Map destinations Last Current office Current Office address Enter Info Traffic } } } } } } } } } } } } } } 223
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Short commands for the voice activation system Contacts* 224 Vehicle information Accessing vehicle status Accessing vehicle information vehicle Accessing New contact New Accessing the trip computer thetrip Accessing contacts My Accessing thecomputer Function Accessing contacts Function Displaying tasks. Displaying calendar. Function Displaying reminders. Displaying Command Command Command { { { { { { { { { { Vehicle status Vehicle info New contact Trip computer Trip contacts My Onboard info Onboard Contacts Tasks Calendar Reminders } } } } } } } } } } Equipment Vehicle Settings Selecting the door lockdoor the Selecting Activating lighting Activating Accessing language and unit unit settings and language Accessing Accessing speed limitAccessing settings Accessing time and date settings date and time Accessing Settings on the Control Display Control the on Settings Accessing options Accessing Accessing settings Accessing Function menu main the Opening Function Selecting air conditioning the Selecting Command Command { { { { { { { { { { Door locks Door Lighting Language and units Speed Time and date Control display Control Options Settings Main menu Main Climate } } } } } } } } } } 225
REFERENCE MOBILITY Communication ENTERTAINMENT NAVIGATION DRIVING TIPS CONTROLS AT A GLANCE Everything from A to Z Air flow rate flow Air manual – – individual automatic – distribution Air – ventilation control climate automatic – conditioner air – mode conditioning Air conditioner Air during thetone Adjusting inside temperature Adjusting inside temperature Adjusting – heating, ventilation control climate automatic – system conditioning air – – entering navigation for Address entering Address, – engine oil for filter Activated-charcoal signals for Acknowledgment Display Control "..." Identifies INDEX Everything fromAtoZ 226 coolant – Additives Control Light Adaptive Your to refer Accessories, System Brake Antilock ABS A Tone control Tone to refer operation, audio climate control car, refertoAutomatic the conditioner car, refertoAirthe automatic climate control vehicle locking/unlocking them... tofind where you tells and functions individual used to select texts individual vehicle individual 189 89 111 89 189 90 88 91 88 , 131 , 87 117 90 88 89 117 4 88 84 88 72 28 89 90 91 Armrest, refer to Center Armrest, refertoCenter vehicle gross Approved oils engine Approved to refer loads, axle Approved Anti-theft system refer system, alarm Anti-theft Antilock Brake SystemABS fluid – washer – coolant Antifreeze careAntenna, lighting Ambient – destination guidance – destination – computer Arrival time All-season All-season tires, referto Winter Alarm system grade fuel to refer AKI, Ventilation to Airing, refer lamp – warning – safely sitting Airbags Air vents – ventilation control climate – automatic – air conditioner Air supply Air to recirculation, refer checking,Air referto pressure, Air vents refer to Air outlets, Ambient air, refer to to refer air, Ambient AM, waveband Timer Always Open armrest refertoWeights weight, Weights to Alarmsystem mode Recirculated-air tires mode Recirculated-air Tire inflationpressure 186 80 88 88 87 189 94 217 , , 61 90 90 91 31 57 193 41 132 82 88 86 27 31 60 189 177 119 178 217 91 72 89 87 Backrests, refertoSeats referto lighting, Background B Automatic transmission with transmission Automatic distribution air – automatic Automatic climatecontrol control – headlamp – cruise control – air flowrate – air distribution Automatic forautomatic AUTO program external device, Audio – volume – tonecontrol on/off – switching – controls Audio – Dynamic Stability Control Assistant systems, refer to Ashtray – overriding selector lever lever selector – overriding – interlock AUX-IN, refer to External audio audio External to AUX-IN, refer AUX-IN connection Auxiliary phone program – sport – shiftlock Avoiding highways highways for Avoiding speed Average theunits – setting fuel Average consumption Axle loads, refer to to refer loads, Axle Ambient lighting Ambient Steptronic control climate DSC lock device navigation Weights 72 130 54 96 95 130 130 217 52 52 52 119 90 131 60 57 153 53 90 90 130 64 86 141 83 95 42 87 60 90 Backup lamps Brake rotors 102 Car key, refer to Keys/remote – replacing bulb 200, 201 – brakes 100 controls 26 Band-aids, refer to First aid – breaking in 100 Car phone pouch 208 Brake system 100 – installation location, refer to AT A GLANCE Bar, refer to Tow-starting, – breaking in 100 Center armrest 94 towing away 210 – disc brakes 102 – refer to separate Owner's Base plate for telephone or – MINI Maintenance Manual mobile phone System 191 Car phone, refer to – refer to Snap-in adapter 163 Brakes Telephone 152
Bass sounds, refer to Tone – ABS 72 Car radio, refer to Radio 132 CONTROLS control 131 – breaking in 100 Car wash, care 193 Battery 206 – MINI Maintenance Car washes 193 – charging 207 System 191 Care 193 – disposal 34, 207 – parking brake 51 – car washes 193 – jump-starting 208 – service requirements 64 – car-care products 193 – temporary power failure 207 Brakes, refer to Braking – CD/DVD drives 196
Battery renewal safely 101 – external 193 TIPS DRIVING – remote control 34 Breakdown service, refer to – high-pressure washers 194 Being towed 210 Roadside Assistance 208 – internal 195 Belt tensioner, refer to Safety Break-in period 100 – leather 195 belts 44 Breaking in the clutch 100 – manual washing 194 Belts, refer to Safety belts 44 Bulb changing, refer to Lamps – upholstery and fabrics 195 Beverage holders, refer to and bulbs 197 – windows 194
Cupholders 96 Button for starting the – wiper blades 194 NAVIGATION Black ice, refer to Outside engine 50 Cargo area 102 temperature warning 59 Buttons on steering wheel 11 – capacity 217 Blower, refer to Air flow – Comfort Access 33 rate 88, 90 C – cover 102 Bluetooth, activating/ – lamp 86 deactivating 153 Calendar 167 – opening from outside 30
Bluetooth audio 144 – displaying appointment 167 Cargo area, expanding 102 ENTERTAINMENT – device pairing 145 – selecting calendar day 167 Cargo area lamp 86 – disconnecting an audio California Proposition 65 Cargo area lid, refer to connection 146 warning 5 Liftgate 30 – playback 146 Call Cargo loading 104 – unpairing device 147 – accepting 157 – securing cargo 105 – What to do if... 147 – ending 157 – stowing cargo 104
Bottle holders, refer to – muting the microphone 158 – vehicle 102 Communication Cupholders 96 – rejecting 157 Cargo, securing 105 Brake Assist 72 Calling, refer to Phone Carpets, care 196 Brake fluid, refer to Service numbers, dialing 158 Catalytic converter, refer to requirements 64 Can holders, refer to Hot exhaust system 100 Brake lamps Cupholders 96 CD, audio playback 139 – replacing bulbs 201 Capacities 218 MOBILITY Brake pads, breaking in 100 Car battery, refer to Vehicle battery 206 Car care 193 REFERENCE 227 Everything from A to Z Center console, refer to refer console, Center Center brakelamp Center armrest – volume control tone – on/off switching – – selecting atrack order random – forward/reverse fast – – controls CD player 228 Child Child fixingrestraint system Check Control referto Chassis number, wheels Changing measurement the Changing the on language the Changing Changing bulbs outside from – – frominside – ComfortAccess Central locking system Cockpit hooks Clothes outside from – – frominside Closing time setting – mode 12h/24h – Clock – washerfluid headlamps Cleaning lighter Cigarette referto parts, Chrome Chrome parts, care parts, Chrome tire spare space-saver – Chock, folding Child seats systems restraint Child console the center Around LATCH Engine compartment Display units on the Control Display Control Care 193 10 48 64 130 14 139 130 47 30 30 66 67 57 131 95 27 27 94 197 140 96 67 70 33 204 130 139 201 195 56 140 47 27 188 204 Condition Based Service Service Based Condition toWhen refer Condensation, onControl – displays Configuring settings, refer to settings, Configuring Consumption, refer to Average Average to refer Consumption, cleaner, vacuum Connecting Control Display, refer to On- to refer Display, Control – switching on/off iDrive to refer Display, Control – settings Control Display contact – new – exporting/importing Contacts Convertible top to refer start, Convenient – windows top – convertible operation Convenient referto access, Convenient Controls and displays On-board to refer unit, Control stick,Control refertoOn-board Comfort area, refer to Around refertoAround area, Comfort before toobserve – what thebattery – replacing Comfort Access the Starting to refer start, Cold Computer remote for Compartment CBS isthe vehicle parked Display Personal Profile Personal fuel consumption fuel appliances electrical Connecting to refer board computer Starting the engine the Starting Comfort Access computer computer the center console center the wash acar entering engine lock Ignition to refer control, 191 50 164 51 61 63 60 28 16 16 96 165 33 37 29 33 26 19 16 60 14 51 10 34 166 102 34 Dashboard referto lighting, Dashboard refer instruments, Dashboard D DBC Dynamic Brake Control, Control, Brake Dynamic DBC lights running Daytime format – setting – setting Date memory Data – weights – engine – dimensions – capacities Data referto Cockpit Dashboard, – fuel filler flap filler – fuel lock – door Defect referto Deadlocking, passenger front Deactivating Cooling fluid, refer to to refer fluid, Cooling temperature Coolant – filling level – checking Coolant Cornering light, refer to to refer light, Cornering Copyright Cooling, maximum Curb weight, to weight, Curb refer Cupholders Cruising range lamp – indicator control Cruise Criteria for route – external devices – external playback Current fuel Current consumption Instrument lighting Instrument to Displays refer toBrakeAssist Locking airbags Coolant Adaptive Light Control Light Adaptive Weights 214 189 189 67 214 81 217 189 28 2 217 30 96 218 12 215 192 60 176 67 189 13 119 143 90 59 86 72 84 84 60 10 Defining a home address 166 Display, refer to On-board DTC Dynamic Traction Control Defogging windows 89, 91 computer controls 16 DTC 73 Defrost position, refer to Displaying contact Dynamic Brake Control DBC, Defrosting windows 89, 91 pictures 166 refer to Brake Assist 72 AT A GLANCE Defrosting windows 89, 91 Displaying special Dynamic destination Defrosting windows and destinations 116 guidance 125 removing condensation Displays 12 Dynamic Stability Control – air conditioner 89 – instrument cluster 12 DSC 72 – automatic climate control 91 – on the Control Display 16 Dynamic Traction Control 73
Defrosting windshield, refer to Displays and controls 10 CONTROLS Defrosting windows 89, 91 Displays, care 196 E Deleting contacts 166 Disposal Destination address – of coolant 189 Eject button, refer to Buttons – entering 111, 117 – remote control battery 34 on the CD player 130 Destination for navigation – vehicle battery 207 Electric power windows – entering 111 Distance remaining to service, – initializing 36
– entering via map 116 refer to Service Electrical malfunction TIPS DRIVING Destination guidance 119 requirements 64 – convertible top 39 – bypassing a route Distance warning, refer to Park – door lock 30 section 120 Distance Control PDC 71 – fuel filler flap 176 – changing specified route 119 Door key, refer to Integrated – liftgate 31 – continuing 119 key/remote control 26 Electronic brake-force – distance and arrival 119 Door lock 29 distribution 72
– starting 119 Door lock, confirmation Electronic Stability Program NAVIGATION – voice instructions 123 signals 28 ESP, refer to Dynamic – volume of voice Doors, manual operation 30 Stability Control DSC 72 instructions 123 DOT Quality Grades 183 Emergency operation, refer to Differential, breaking in 100 Drinks holders, refer to Manual operation Digital radio, refer to HD Cupholders 96 – convertible top 39 Radio 133 Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill – door lock 30
Dimensions 215 Assist 73 – fuel filler flap 176 ENTERTAINMENT Dipstick, engine oil 188 Driving dynamics control, refer – liftgate 31 Direction announcements, to Sport button 74 – transmission lock, automatic refer to Voice Driving lamps, refer to Parking transmission 54 instructions 123 lamps/low beams 83 Emergency services, refer to Direction instructions, refer to Driving notes 100 Roadside Assistance 208 Voice instructions 123 Driving off on inclines, refer to Engine
Directional indicators, refer to Hill Assist 73 – breaking in 100 Communication Turn signals 54 Driving stability control – data 214 Directory for navigation, refer systems 72 – overheated, refer to Coolant to Address book 113 Driving through water 101 temperature 59 Displacement, refer to Engine Driving tips, refer to Driving – speed 214 data 214 notes 100 – starting 51 Display lighting, refer to Dry air, refer to Cooling – starting, Comfort Access 33 MOBILITY Instrument lighting 86 function 91 – switching off 51 REFERENCE 229 Everything from A to Z Engine coolant, refer to refer to coolant, Engine Engine compartment 230 – intervals between changes, changes, between intervals – – dipstick – checkinglevel – capacity oils engine – approved – alternative oil types refertoApproved – additives, – adding Engine oil – indicatorlamp malfunction Engine – MINI Maintenance Entertainment sound output sound output Entertainment intersection Entering destination Entering to starting, refer Engine toEngine refer output, Engine oilEngine level, checking Entrymap for destination – for tying down loads towing and tow-starting – for Eyes – software update sequence play – random External devices refer to device, audio External External audio device out and in folding – heating automatic – – adjusting mirrors Exterior referto Hot system, Exhaust ESP Electronic Stability Coolant requirements toService refer engine oils System on/off engine the Starting data away port AUX-IN system exhaust DSC Control Stability Dynamic to refer Program, 214 210 130 189 191 188 189 189 45 189 141 64 45 188 13 100 148 45 45 111 112 51 188 189 95 72 105 189 144 188 116 Failure ofanelectrical Failure to refer messages, Failure F Fastest route for route Fastest belts, refer safety to Fastening player – CD Fast forward Fixture for remote control, forremote Fixture First aid pouch Fine wood, care – microfilter/activated- air for microfilter – Filter to Check refer messages, Fault Flat tires, refer to Tire to refer tires, Flat – systemlimits chains – snow system the – initializing tire aflat – indicating FTM Flat Monitor Tire TPM Monitor Pressure Tire – – run-flattires Flat tire Flash whenlocking/ Footbrake, toBraking refer Footbrake, to refer roof, Folding backrest seat rear Folding bulb – replacing Fog lamps FM, waveband Floor mats, care For your own safety own your For lamps Footwell consumer Check Control navigation belts Safety refer to lock to Ignition refer control climate automatic for filter charcoal conditioner Control condition unlocking safely sunroof sliding integrated Convertible top with 101 67 140 184 28 207 119 44 89 74 185 74 208 132 86 67 196 199 196 91 5 , 75 201 74 50 75 102 76 37 Fuses of theevent in – releasing Fuel filler flap Fuel to refer display, Fuel consumption fuel – average Fuel display consumption Fuel clock, refertoFuel capacity – tank Gasoline, refer to Required toRequired Gasoline, refer Gasoline display, refer to Fuel fuel – refertoAverage Gasoline to opener, refer door Garage G – automatic transmission with with transmission – automatic indicator Gear – automatic transmission with with transmission – automatic lever Gearshift – manual transmission transmission – automatic shifting Gear General driving notes driving General – manual transmission FTM, refer to Flat Tire toFlat Tire FTM, refer – specifications – quality brands – high-quality – gauge Fuel Frost on windows, refer to to refer windows, on Frost adjustment seat Front bulb – replacing lamps fog Front airbags Front electrical malfunction electrical gauge gauge fuel gauge consumption control remote universal Integrated Steptronic Steptronic Monitor Defrosting windows Defrosting 177 207 177 59 59 59 59 177 92 74 52 52 80 176 218 60 177 85 199 177 100 89 42 52 52 176 , 52 91 60 Glass sunroof, electric 35 High beams 85 Information – Convenient operation 28, 29 – headlamp flasher 85 – on another location 114 – opening, closing 35 – indicator lamp 13 – on current position 114 – remote control 28 – replacing bulb 198 – on destination location 114 AT A GLANCE – tilting 35 High water, refer to Driving Initializing Glove compartment 94 through water 101 – Flat Tire Monitor FTM 75 GPS navigation, refer to Highway, refer to Route – glass sunroof, electric 35 Navigation system 110 criteria 119 – radio, refer to Station, Grills, refer to Air vents 87 Hill Assist 73 storing 133
Gross vehicle weight, refer to Hills 101 Instructions for navigation CONTROLS Weights 217 Holders for cups 96 system, refer to Voice Homepage 4 instructions 123 H Hood 187 Instrument cluster, refer to Horn 10 Displays 12 Halogen lamps Hot exhaust system 100 Instrument lighting 86 – replacing bulb 198 Hydroplaning 101 Instrument panel, refer to
Handbrake, refer to Parking Cockpit 10 TIPS DRIVING brake 51 I Instrument panel, refer to Hands-free system 14, 160 Displays 12 Hazard warning flashers 14 IBOC, refer to HD Radio 133 Integrated key 26 HD Radio 133 iDrive Integrated universal remote Head airbags 80 – status information 19 control 92 Head Light, refer to Adaptive Ignition 50 Interactive map 116
Light Control 84 – switched off 50 Interesting destination for NAVIGATION Head restraints 43 – switched on 50 navigation 114 – sitting safely 41 Ignition key position 1, refer to Interior lamps 86 Headlamp control, Radio readiness 50 – remote control 28 automatic 83 Ignition key position 2, refer to Interior rearview mirror 46 Headlamp flasher 54 Ignition on 50 – automatic dimming – indicator lamp 11, 13 Ignition key, refer to feature 46
Headlamps Integrated key/remote Interlock 52 ENTERTAINMENT – replacing bulb 198 control 26 Intermittent mode of the Headlamps, care 194 Ignition lock 50 wipers 55 Headlight glass lens 198 Imprint 2 Internet page 4 Heated Incoming call 157 – mirrors 45 Indicator and warning J – rear window 88, 91 lamps 13
– seats 44 – Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 77 Jacking points 206 Communication Heating 87 Indicator lighting, refer to Jets, refer to Window washer – mirrors 45 Instrument lighting 86 nozzles 56 – rear window 88, 91 Individual air distribution 89 Joystick, refer to On-board – seats 44 Individual settings, refer to computer 16 Heavy loads, refer to Stowing Personal Profile 26 Jumpering, refer to Jump- cargo 104 Inflation pressure monitoring, starting 208 MOBILITY Height adjustment refer to Tire Pressure Monitor Jump-starting 208 – seats 42 TPM 76 – steering wheel 46 Height, refer to Dimensions 215 REFERENCE 231 Everything from A to Z Keyless opening and closing, closing, and opening Keyless refertoKeys/remote Key, Personal to refer Memory, Key K 232 Lamps and bulbs,replacing L Knock control with transmission – automatic Kickdown Keypad dialing Comfort to refer Keyless-Go, Lashing eyes, refer to Securing refertoSecuring eyes, Lashing lamps/ Parking to refer Lamps, Length, refer to to refer Length, diodes light-emitting LEDs care Leather fixing restraint child LATCH destinations Last Light-emitting diodes wheels,Light-alloy care Light switch remote with – unlocking opening/closing – – openingfrom outside releasing manually – operation emergency – – ComfortAccess Liftgate – bulbreplacement plate lamp License – socket Lighter refer to Comfort Access toComfort refer controls Profile bulbs Steptronic Access cargo Low beams Dimensions system LEDs control 198 96 197 105 30 96 26 33 48 29 26 53 83 53 195 83 215 177 159 114 33 30 201 31 30 31 195 33 198 M+S tires, refer to Winter Winter to refer tires, M+S M refer actuation, – emergency Maintenance, refer to Service Service to refer Maintenance, menu Main Luggage compartment, refer compartment, Luggage lid, compartment Luggage Lumbar support refertoRoof- rack, Luggage – without remote control, refer refer control, remote – without – from outside inside – from confirmation – adjusting Locking refer to ofdoors, buttons Lock equipment, securing Load Load refertoSpeedLimit, limit refertoLamps – of vehicle, instruments the of – – lamps and bulbs Lighting – emergency operation, refer refer operation, – emergency compartment Luggage to refer support, back Lower bulb – replacing – automatic beams Low – from outside inside – from signals – confirmation doors unlocking and Locking Luggage compartment lid compartment Luggage fromtheinside – opening thecapacity – increasing tires to manually releasing Booklet to Cargo area to Cargo Liftgate to refer mounted luggage rack mounted luggage to Comfort Access to Comfort signal Locking cargo Securing to refer to Manually releasing to Manually Lumbar support 104 186 28 30 17 83 83 30 30 28 27 30 198 42 30 42 197 33 86 28 31 31 105 105 103 69 31 83 – automatic transmission with with transmission – automatic mode Manual air distribution Manual to refer warnings, Malfunction – liftgate top – convertible Malfunction system Maintenance – transmission lock, automatic lock, automatic – transmission top convertible – power – liftgate flap filler – fuel lock – door operation Manual – MINI Maintenance Maintenance – MINI – for automatic climate conditioner air – for Microfilter Messages referto On-board Menus, button MENU referMedical to assistance, tires winter – with speed Maximum cooling Maximum Integrated to key, refer Master destination – entering fornavigation Map scale – changing Map washing Manual transmission Manual – MINI Maintenance Maintenance – MINI Microfilter/activated-charcoal MINI joystick, referto On- MINI page Internet MINI Connected MINI MINI Maintenance System Maintenance MINI Steptronic Control Check transmission System control computer First aid pouch control key/remote System filter board computer board 31 31 91 191 191 167 30 16 53 16 54 176 67 171 194 122 208 39 186 90 16 4 89 52 191 26 116 89 39 191 Mirror dimming feature 46 Navigation system 110 Oil, refer to Engine oil 188 Mirrors 45 – address book 113 Oil types 189 – exterior mirrors 45 – bypassing a route Old batteries, refer to – heating 45 section 120 Disposal 207 AT A GLANCE – interior rearview mirror 46 – continuing destination On-board computer 16 Mobile phone guidance 119 – adjusting brightness 70 – adjusting volume 157 – destination entry 111 – changing language 70 – connecting, refer to Mobile – dynamic destination – menu guidance 17 phone, pairing 152 guidance 125 – operating principles 16
– installation location, refer to – entering a destination – overview 16 CONTROLS Center armrest 94 manually 111, 117 On-board vehicle tool kit 197 – pairing 152 – opening 110 Opening and closing – refer to separate Owner's – planning a trip 118 – Comfort Access 33 Manual – route list 120 – from inside 30 – What to do if… 156 – selecting destination via – from outside 27 Mobile phone, installation map 116 – using the door lock 29
location, refer to Center – selecting route criteria 119 – using the remote control 27 TIPS DRIVING armrest 94 – special destinations 114 Opening and unlocking Mobile phone, refer to the – starting destination – from inside 30 separate Owner's Manual guidance 119 Options, selecting for Mobility System 202 – terminating destination navigation 119 Modifications, technical, refer guidance 119 Orientation menu, refer to to For your own safety 5 – voice instructions 123 Main menu 17
Monitor, refer to MINI controls – volume adjustment 123 Outlets NAVIGATION with navigation 16 Neck support, refer to Head – refer to Ventilation 91 Monitoring system for tire restraints 43 Outlets, refer to Air vents 87 pressures, refer to Flat Tire Nets, refer to Storage Output, refer to Engine Monitor 74 compartments 95 data 214 Multifunction switch New tires 185 Outside temperature display – refer to Turn signals/ North-facing map 121 – change units of measure 64
headlamp flasher 54 Notes 169 – in the onboard computer 64 ENTERTAINMENT – refer to Wiper system 55 Number of cylinders, refer to Outside-air mode Multifunctional steering Engine data 214 – automatic climate control 90 wheel, refer to Buttons on Number of safety belts 41 Overheated engine, refer to the steering wheel 11 Nylon rope, refer to Tow Coolant temperature 59 rope 211 N P O Communication Navigation Paintwork, care 195 – storing current position 113 OBD socket, refer to Socket for Park Distance Control PDC 71 Navigation data 110 On-Board Diagnosis 191 Parking Navigation destination Octane ratings, refer to Fuel – vehicle 51 – entering manually 111, 117 specifications 177 Parking aid, refer to Park – home address 114 Odometer 59 Distance Control PDC 71 MOBILITY Navigation instructions, refer Office 164 Parking brake 51 to Switching voice – current office 164 – indicator lamp 13 instructions on/off 123 – What to do if… 170 Parking lamps, replacing Oil consumption 188 bulb 199 Oil level 188 Parking lamps/low beams 83 REFERENCE 233 Everything from A to Z Radio position, refer to Radio toRadio position, refer Radio key, refer to Integrated Radio to refer accessories, and Parts 234 – volume control tone – on/off switching – stations storing – – selectwaveband – satelliteradio Radio– HD – controls Radio R Pathway lighting Pathway – refer to Microfilter for air for toMicrofilter – refer Pollen care parts, Plastic – windows system protection Pinch – dialing Phone numbers Profile Personal Power convertible top convertible Power Microfilter/activated- to refer – – FlatTire Monitor Puncture – windows referto function, Protective tires Pressure, – FlatTire Monitor tires monitoring, Pressure tires, monitoring of Pressure to refer windows, Power windows Power Power failure readiness control key/remote Your individual vehicle conditioner climate control forautomatic filter charcoal Pinch protection system protection Pinch TPM Monitor Pressure toTire refer Windows 76 158 130 130 36 36 35 133 50 207 89 131 178 134 26 36 83 91 133 196 130 74 74 132 26 37 4 74 Replacement remote remote Replacement data – service Replacing tires, refer to New New to refer tires, Replacing to refer bulbs, Replacing Rear lamps, refer to Tail lamps, refertoTail Rear replacement – bulb Rear lamps bulb – replacing lamp – indicator Rear fog lamp Reading lamps Reading aloud to Cruising refer Range, devices – external Random play sequence Rain sensor on – switched off – switched Radio readiness – malfunctions – liftgate opener door – garage Access – Comfort renewal – battery Remote control Reminders – hood Releasing Refueling seat,referto Reclining ofair, referto Recirculation mirror, referto Rearview Recirculated-air mode station – radio – quality Reception defroster window Rear backrests the – folding seats Rear folding backrest, seat Rear control wheels and tires and wheels bulbs and Lamps lamps range Backrest mode Recirculated-air Mirrors 187 60 88 200 133 29 26 45 176 , 42 169 90 55 191 50 50 85 133 169 29 86 26 50 201 13 33 , 34 144 185 34 197 201 92 88 102 88 , , 90 102 91 Reservoir for washer forwasher Reservoir refertoFuel warning, Reserve Reporting safety defects – automatic transmission with with transmission – automatic gear Reverse player – CD Reverse belts – refertoSafety – forchildren Restraint systems tone Resetting to refer Reset, Roadworthiness test, refer to to refer test, Roadworthiness bulb – replacing lamps parking Roadside Assistance Roadside map Road – manual transmission Roof-mounted luggage luggage Roof-mounted capacity load Roof Rope, refer to Tow-starting, refertoTow-starting, Rope, RSC Run-flat System System Run-flat RSC selection Route section, Route changing – selecting towns/ or displaying streets – view map – displaying view – displaying arrow criteria – changing – changing – bypassing sections Route Run-flat System Component Component System Run-flat care parts, Rubber systems gauge Steptronic settings Service requirements Service rack towing away towing tires to Run-flat refer Component, cities tires toRun-flat RSC, refer 119 105 185 185 120 59 131 57 , 121 119 119 120 140 53 47 211 , 119 199 120 195 217 119 208 120 44 121 52 64 120 85 120 6 Run-flat tires 185 Selecting new scale for Side windows, refer to – flat tire 75 navigation 122 Windows 35 – tire inflation pressure 178 Selector lever Signal horn, refer to Horn 10 – tire replacement 185 – automatic transmission with Sitting safely 41 AT A GLANCE – winter tires 186 Steptronic 52 – airbags 41 Selector lever lock – safety belts 41 S – automatic transmission with – with head restraint 41 Steptronic, refer to Size, refer to Dimensions 215 Safety belt Shiftlock 52 Sliding/tilt sunroof
– number 41 – overriding manually 54 – refer to Glass sunroof, CONTROLS Safety Belt Reminder 45 Selector lever positions electric 35 Safety belts 44 – automatic transmission with Slipstream deflector, refer to – damage 45 Steptronic 52 Wind deflector 40 – indicator lamp 45 Service car, refer to Roadside Slot for remote control 50 – reminder 45 Assistance 208 Smokers' package, refer to – sitting safely 41 Service data in the remote Ashtray 96
Safety belts, care 196 control 191 Snap-in adapter TIPS DRIVING Safety systems Service Interval Display, refer – inserting/removing 163 – airbags 80 to Condition Based Service – use 152 – Antilock Brake System CBS 191 Snap-in adapter, refer to ABS 72 Service, refer to Roadside Center armrest storage – Dynamic Stability Control Assistance 208 compartment 94 DSC 72 Service requirement display, Snow chains 186
– safety belts 44 refer to Condition Based Socket for On-Board Diagnosis NAVIGATION Safety tires, refer to Run-flat Service CBS 191 OBD 191 tires 185 Service requirements 64 Socket, refer to Connecting Satellite radio 134 Setting time and date 66 electrical appliances 96 – channel, activating or Setting time zone, time, and Software update 148 deactivating 134 date 66 Space-saver spare tire – channel, selecting 135 Settings – changing tires 204
– channel, storing 135 – clock, 12h/24h mode 67 – inflation pressure 178 ENTERTAINMENT – favorites 137 – date format 67 Spare wheel, refer to Space- – time shift 136 Shifting gears saver spare tire 204 – Traffic Jump 138 – automatic transmission with Speaking, refer to Voice Screen, refer to On-board Steptronic 53 instructions from navigation computer controls 16 – manual transmission 52 system 123 Screw thread for tow Shiftlock Special destinations 114
fitting 210 – automatic transmission, refer Special oils, refer to Approved Communication SDARS, refer to Satellite to Changing selector lever engine oils 189 radio 134 positions 52 Speed 214 Seat adjustment Short commands for the voice – with winter tires 186 – mechanical 42 activation system 219 Speed limit 69 Seats 42 Short route in navigation, refer – setting 69 – adjusting the seats 42 to Selecting route 119 Speed limit warning, refer to MOBILITY – heating 44 Shuffled, refer to Random Speed limit 69 – sitting safely 41 – CD player 140 Speed Volume 131 Securing the vehicle Side airbags 80 Speedo, refer to – from inside 30 Side turn signal Speedometer 12 – from outside 27 – replacing bulb 200 Speedometer 12 REFERENCE 235 Everything from A to Z Split rear backrest, refer to refer rearbackrest, Split 236 Starting refer to assistance, Starting engine the off – switching engine the starting – button Start/Stop to refer control, Stability button Sport to refer backrest, rearseat Split State/province, for State/province, Assist Hill – – DSC to refer assistance, Start-off button Start/Stop – engine the Starting the Starting to refer Starting, Status of this Owner's Manual Manual ofthis Owner's Status onthe information Status – radio selectingStation, – Luggage compartment in the in the compartment Luggage – to refer space, Storage compartments storage – space Storage compartments Storage front compartment, Storage – cargo area area Storage refertoAutomatic Steptronic, – shiftpaddles – lock wheel steering on buttons – – adjustment wheel Steering Through-loading system Through-loading Jump-starting systems control stability Driving area Expanding the cargo navigation engine at time of of printing time at Display Control MINI Convertible side passenger Steptronic with transmission 72 50 102 132 51 72 73 52 102 111 74 46 53 46 208 95 19 50 103 50 4 51 95 95 51 103 11 – status information – status Symbols Tail lamp, refer to Tail to refer lamp, Tail Tachometer T Target cursor for cursor Target to refer volume, Tank lamps Tail bulb – replacing Telephone call, refertothe Telephone – voice commands Owner's separate to refer – referto location, – installation – hands-free system Telephone modifications Technical data Technical Tasks Storing a destination in the the in adestination Storing Switching the cooling function – radio player – CD – audio Switching on button – Start/Stop Switching off the engine – engine Switching off Switches, refertoCockpit SW, waveband Wheels to refer tires, Summer refertoStorage Stowage, tires Storing thevehicle Storing on and off on and lamps navigation Capacities telephone the for Manual Owner's Manual Center armrest address book and tires and compartments 168 130 130 200 4 51 200 178 152 130 186 218 59 91 116 214 132 113 200 95 94 196 161 50 19 160 5 10 Tire pressure monitoring, refer refer monitoring, Tire pressure lamp – warning Tire Quality Grading Tire Quality Tightening torque, refer to to refer torque, Tightening – torque – keys bolts thelug Tightening system Through-loading belt safety Three-point brakeThird lamp, refer to The individual vehicle Text message referto straps, Tensioning Cruise to refer Tempomat, control climate – automatic – airconditioner setting Temperature refer ofcoolant, Temperature theunits – setting display Temperature power, receiving Telephone – loss pressure inflation Tire Monitor – Tire Pressure spare tire – space-saver – run-flattires System Mobility – MINI lamp – indicator/warning Monitor Tire – Flat Tire failure spare tire – space-saver set Tire change – resetting system – resetting – limitations of system TPM Monitor Tire Pressure spare tire – space-saver to Flat Tire Monitor Tire to Flat Tightening lug lug bolts Tightening brakeCenter lamp cargo Securing control temperature to Coolant information refer toStatus 75 204 , 206 57 76 19 167 75 77 88 105 64 77 75 183 201 74 4 178 206 76 44 202 76 204 204 178 103 75 59 76 90 Tires TPM, refer to Tire Pressure Turn signal 54 – age 185 Monitor 76 – front, replacing bulb 199 – breaking in 100 Track – indicator lamp 12, 13 – changing, refer to Changing – selecting on CD 139 – rear, replacing bulb 200 AT A GLANCE wheels 204 Track width, refer to – side, replacing bulb 200 – condition 184 Dimension 215 Turning circle, refer to – damage 184 Traction control, refer to Dimensions 215 – inflation pressure 178 – Dynamic Stability Control Tying down loads, refer to – inflation pressure loss 77 DSC 72 Cargo loading 105
– minimum tread depth 184 Traffic bulletins CONTROLS – new tires 185 – categories 125 U – pressure monitoring, refer to Traffic bulletins, filtering 125 Flat Tire Monitor 74 Traffic congestion Uniform Tire Quality Grading – pressure monitoring, refer to – displaying traffic UTQR 183 Tire Pressure Monitor information 123 Units TPM 76 – refer to Route, bypassing – average fuel consumption 64
– puncture 75 segments 120 – temperature 64 TIPS DRIVING – size 183 Traffic information for Universal garage door opener, – wear indicators, refer to navigation refer to Integrated universal Minimum tread depth 184 – displaying 124 remote control 92 – winter tires 186 Traffic information in Universal remote control 92 – with emergency operation navigation Unlatching, refer to properties 185 – screen display in the map Unlocking 33
Tires with emergency view 124 Unlocking NAVIGATION operation properties, refer to Trailer operation – from inside 30 Run-flat tires 185 – trailer loads and gross vehicle – from outside 27 Tires with safety features, refer weight 217 – liftgate 33 to Run-flat tires 185 Transmission – without remote control, refer TMC station, refer to Traffic – automatic transmission with to Comfort Access 33 information 123 Steptronic 52 Updating the navigation
Tone – manual transmission 52 data 110 ENTERTAINMENT – middle setting 131 – overriding selector lever lock Upholstery, care 195 Tone during audio playback for automatic transmission USB audio interface 142 – adjusting 131 with Steptronic 54 Tools, refer to On-board Transport securing devices, V vehicle tool kit 197 refer to Securing cargo 105 Torque 214 Transporting children safely 47 Valve
– lug bolts 206 Tread depth, refer to Minimum – dust cap 205 Communication Tow bar 210 tire tread 184 Vehicle Tow fitting 210 Treble, refer to Tone – battery 206 – screw thread 210 control 131 – breaking in 100 Tow fittings for tow-starting Trip computer 61 – cargo loading 102 and towing away 210 Trip odometer 59 – dimensions 215 Tow rope 211 Trip-distance counter, refer to – identification number, refer MOBILITY Towing 210 Trip odometer 59 to Engine compartment 188 – car with automatic Triple turn signal activation 54 – parking 51 transmission 210 Trunk, refer to Luggage – storage 196 – methods 210 compartment in the MINI – weight 217 Tow-starting 210 Convertible 103 REFERENCE 237 Everything from A to Z Volume balance, tone instructions voice – – mobilephone – audiosources Volume book phone Voice – volume on/off switching – – repeating Voice instructions for – telephone – shortcommands overview – Voice commands Vents, refer to Ventilation vents Air to refer Vents, conditioner air – Ventilation – jackingpoints Vehicle jack 238 indicator and Warning W cargoof area Volume Water on roads, onroads, refer Water to toAshtray tray, refer Waste fluid Washer reservoir – capacity of reservoir fluidWasher triangleWarning referto messages, Warning Wear indicators in tires, refer to to tires, refer in indicators Wear forradio Waveband lighting, refer to Waterfall Wheelbase, referto Wheelbase, tire spare space-saver – wrench stud Wheel lamps Welcome Weights Wheels and tires and Wheels setting system navigation lamps Driving through water through Driving Check Control Minimum tread depth lighting Ambient Dimensions 130 13 217 131 123 21 123 204 161 57 215 130 206 157 67 83 91 178 208 123 162 219 86 123 132 123 217 57 57 87 204 184 101 91 96 Wrench/screwdriver, referto Wrench/screwdriver, – replacing bulb – replacing lamps Xenon X Width, refer to Wheels, new Window Window referwasher, to Wind deflector – defrosting and removing – cleaning Windshield onControl indicator Windows, system protection pinch – – opening operation – Convenient – closing Windows jets – washer fluid – washer system washer Window refer to – volume, reservoir, washer Window Windshield wipers, refer to to refer wipers, Windshield Windshield wiper blades, Word matching principle for principle matching Word Wiper system replacement blade Wiper – storage limit– speed setting Winter tires Work in theengine Work kit tool vehicle On-board compartment Dimensions Washer fluid condensation Display Capacities fluid Washer to refer Wiper system changing navigation 197 36 16 35 186 36 56 197 186 218 118 185 56 55 215 57 57 40 55 89 187 198 , 91 69 28 55 197 36
*BL2605675003* DRIVE ME.
01 40 2 605 675 ue